A,

S
Addendum,
Supplements
i

Using this Manual,

Contents
1

® Safety

2
The Global Leader in Food Cutting Technology
General
Information
3

Installation

Operation

5
Routine
Maintenance
and Cleaning
6

Machine Setup

Service and Repair

Sprint 2™ Dicer Electrical System

Model SPR2 9
Instruction and Parts Manuals
Troubleshooting

10

E
Language
Code

Parts Manual
English
 Sprint 2™ Dicer
Model SPR2
Instruction Manual
Publication Description: MANUAL, ENGLISH, INSTRUCTION, SPRINT 2
Publication Number: L2855
Date issued: August 2015

URSCHEL
CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS
1200 Cutting Edge Drive
Chesterton, Indiana 46304 U.S.A.
Corporate: +1.219.464.4811
Fax: +1.219.462.3879
Toll Free: +1.844.URSCHEL (877.2435)
www.urschel.com
Inquiries regarding Technical Publications: techpubs@urschel.com
All other inquiries: info@urschel.com

Sales offices and subsidiaries are located in principal cities worldwide; see the website for the location of the
nearest office.

This instruction manual contains the most recent information available and represents the machine as it is
currently manufactured at the time of publication. Urschel Laboratories reserves the right to make changes at
any time without notice. If your machine contains parts not shown, or if there are any questions regarding the
safe operation of this machine, contact Urschel Laboratories or your Urschel representative.

COPYRIGHT© 2015 Urschel Laboratories, Incorporated. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and
recording, for any purpose without the express written permission of Urschel Laboratories, Inc.

® ™ Urschel is a registered trademarks and Sprint 2 and Urschelube are pending trademarks of Urschel
Laboratories, Inc.
® Acetron is a registered trademark of Quadrant EPP.
® Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.
® Loctite is a registered trademark of Henkel Corp.
® Never-Seez is a registered trademark of Bostik, Inc.
® Nylok is a registered trademark of Nylok Fastener Corp.
ii Using this Manual
Message to the User
This manual must be read by or to
each person before that person operates,
cleans, repairs, adjusts, installs, supervises
the operation of, or uses this machine in any
way.
Insist on thorough and proper safety
training. Never work beyond defined
safety skills. Notify your supervisor of any
machine condition which may create a
hazard in its operation. Notify Urschel
Laboratories immediately of any accidents
that have occurred on this machine.
Learn and follow all the safety rules
and operating principles in this manual.
Follow all warnings, cautions, and other
safety messages in this manual and on the
machine. Recognize the safety alert
symbol  , which indicates a potential
personal safety hazard.
Qualified personnel is a term used in
this manual to mean “one who, by
possession of a recognized degree,
certificate, or professional standing, or
who, by extensive knowledge, training,
and experience, has successfully
demonstrated his ability to solve or
resolve problems relating to the subject
matter, the work, or the project” (OSHA
1926.32m).
If there are any questions regarding the
safe operation of this machine, contact
your Urschel representative.
Messages in the Manual
The following messages are used in this
manual:
 CAUTION
This alert is followed by a statement that
describes a potential hazard which may
result in minor injury.
 WARNING
This alert is followed by a statement that
describes a potential hazard that could
result in serious injury or death.
 DANGER
This alert is followed by a statement that
describes a potential hazard that will result
in serious injury or death.
NOTICE
This word is followed by a statement that
alerts you to key information or
instructions.
IMPORTANT
This word is followed by a statement that
alerts you to machine conditions that must
be verified or corrected, or damage to the
machine may occur.
See the Addendum for 1 Using this Manual
updated information
Instruction and Parts Manuals
This Instruction Manual is supplied with a
Parts Manual. These manuals may be
updated independently. Visit the Urschel
website at www.urschel.com to check for
the latest publications for your machine.
Addendum and Other Resources
Revisions to the Instruction Manual are
published in an addendum. The
addendum is placed in the front of the
manual to alert the user to changes in the
manual's contents. Addendum page
numbers have an “A” prefix. A page in the
manual with revisions will have a
message box (1) as shown at the top of
this page. Click on this button in the
electronic manual to navigate to the
corresponding page in the addendum.
Special topics such as new parts or
applications are published in a
supplement. A supplement is included in
the front of the machine manual when this
additional information is appropriate.
Supplement page numbers have an “S”
prefix.
iii
Ordering Technical Publications
To obtain a manual, contact your
Urschel representative or request a
manual through the company website at
www.urschel.com. You can also email your
request to techpubs@urschel.com. Please
include the machine model, serial number,
the name of your company and the
language required.
Manuals are available in printed and
electronic forms. Most manuals are
available in several languages. Printed
manuals and electronic media (CD-ROM
disks and USB drives) are free of charge
and postage paid.
Publications are reviewed and updated
regularly. Check the Urschel website for
the latest publications for your machine.
iv

This page intentionally left blank.

 Contents v

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

Message to the User, Messages in the Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Instruction and Parts Manuals, Addendum and Other Resources,
Ordering Technical Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Section 1 Safety
Purpose and Contents, Rules for Safe Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Lockout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Safety Signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Protective Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Daily Safety System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8

Section 2 General Information

Contents, Specifications, Applications, Product Input Limitations. . . . 2.1
Noise Emission, Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Sizes and Types of Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3

Section 3 Installation
Purpose and Contents, Machine Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Guard Locking Switch Status for Shipment,
Planning Installation of the Machine, Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Lifting the Machine, Machine with Casters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Installing the Machine with Product Feeding and
Collection Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
The Feed Opening, The Discharge Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Installing Product Feeding and Collection Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Customizing the Feed Hopper Extension and
Discharge Chute Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Minimum Safe Reach Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Requirements for Additional Guarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Elevated or Lowering the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Risk Assessment Before Using a Machine in Production,
Repurpose or Resale of the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
vi Contents

Section 4 Operation
Purpose and Contents, Safety Considerations
before Operating the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Start up Procedure, Stopping Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Feeding Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Speed Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Motor Overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Correcting a Product Jam in the Cutting Parts,
Method to Clear a Jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6

Section 5 Routine Maintenance and Cleaning

Purpose and Contents of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Lockout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Opening a Guard Equipped with a Guard Locking Switch . . . . . . . 5.3
Location of Guards, Inspecting the Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Cleaning, Daily Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Safety Signs, Installing Safety Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Recommended Lubricant, Lubrication Points, Lubrication Schedule . 5.8

Section 6 Machine Setup

Purpose and Contents, Product Testing Laboratories,
Factors Affecting the Output, Electrical Assemblies,
Motor Horsepower and Speed Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Selecting Parts for Dicing,
Strip Cutting and Slicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Slicing Case and Slice Gate, Impellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Slicing Knife Holders and Insert Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
One-Piece Slicing Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Features of Slicing Knives and Slicing Knife Holders . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
Circular Support Assemblies, Fastening Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Feed Discs and Feed Spindle Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
Stripper Plates, Primary Stripper Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
Stripper Plate Spacers and Shims for
Primary Stripper Plates, Secondary Stripper Plates and
Cut-off Stripper Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
Shredding Spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
 Contents vii

Section 7 Service and Repair

Purpose and Contents of this Section, Cutting Unit Overview and
Maintenance Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Lockout Procedure and Safety Precautions
Before Beginning Service and Repair, The Cutting Unit . . . . . . . . 7.3
Removing the Circular Support Assembly, Inspecting the
Circular Support Assembly and Drive Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Installing the Circular Support Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Removing the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
Installing the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
Removing the Primary Stripper Plate and Slicing Knife . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
Inspecting the Primary Stripper Plate and Slicing Knife . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Installing the Slicing Knife and Primary Stripper Plate . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Removing and Installing the Impeller,
Cleaning the Hinge Area of the Slice Gate,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Removing the Slice Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Installing the Slice Gate, Gate Extension and Slice Thickness . . . . . . 7.14
Adjusting the Slice Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Disassembling the Circular Support Assembly and Spindle . . . . . . . . 7.16
Inspecting the Circular Support Assembly and Spindle,
Replacing the Bearings in the Circular Support Assembly. . . . . . . . 7.17
Reassembling the Circular Knife Spindle and
Support Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Disassembling the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly,
Inspecting the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
Reassembling the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
Disassembling the Shred Spindle Assembly,
Inspecting the Shred Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
Reassembling the Shred Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Knife Care Guidelines, Sharpening Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24
Buffing the Knife Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25
Replacing the Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26
Adjusting Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
Removing and Installing the Feed Cover and Slicing Case . . . . . . . . 7.28
Evaluating the Bearing Spindle Assemblies for Wear,
Removing and Installing the Bearing Spindle Assemblies . . . . . . . . 7.29
viii Contents

Section 8 Electrical System

Purpose and Contents of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Two Disconnect Switches,
Routine Maintenance of the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Electrical Enclosure Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Safety Relay, Guard Locking Switch and Standstill Monitor . . . . . . 8.4
Mini Circuit Breakers (MCB) and Fuses, Soft Start Controller. . . . . 8.5
Function of the Guard Locking Switch Circuit,
Operation of the Guard Locking Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
Guard Locking Switch Status LEDs,
Replacing the Guard Locking Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7
Function of the Standstill Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
Standstill Monitor Status LEDs, Safety Relay LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
Function of the Variable Frequency Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10
Function of the Electrical System, Machine with a VFD . . . . . . . . 8.12
Function of the Electrical System, Machine with a Soft Start . . . . . 8.14
 Contents ix

Section 9 Troubleshooting
Purpose and Contents, Size or Shape of Cut
Problem: The dices are not uniform or the product is crushed . . . . 9.1
Sounds and noises coming from the machine that may
indicate a mechanical problem
Problem: Harsh, metallic, grinding sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Problem: Regular or intermittent clicking sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Problem: Irregular chattering sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Electrical System and Motor, Electrical Troubleshooting Overview . . 9.3
Problem: The machine will not start.
Items to check before proceeding to the flowcharts . . . . . . . . . 9.4
Flow Charts, Machine with a VFD
Problem: The machine will not start.
Flowchart 1, Machine with a VFD: Isolating the fault . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
Flowchart 2, Machine with a VFD: Checking
input loops to the safety relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
Problem: A guard will not open; the guard locking switch
will not release the actuator.
Flowchart 3, Machine with a VFD: Checking for an
electrical problem in the guard locking switch circuit . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
Problem: The machine stops due to an overload
Flowchart 4, Machine with a VFD: Isolating the cause
of motor overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16
Checking for a balanced power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.17
Flow Charts, Machine with a Soft Start
Problem: The machine will not start.
Flowchart 5, Machine with a Soft Start: Isolating the fault . . . . . . . 9.18
Flowchart 6, Machine with a Soft Start: Checking
input loops to the safety relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
Problem: A guard will not open; the guard locking switch
will not release the actuator.
Flowchart 7, Machine with a Soft Start: Checking for an
electrical problem in the guard locking switch circuit . . . . . . . . . . 9.24
Problem: The machine stops due to an overload
Flowchart 8, Machine with a Soft Start: Isolating the
cause of motor overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26
Checking for a balanced power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.27
Problem: Slow, sluggish operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
Problem: Cutting parts are still in motion when a guard is open. . . 9.28
Problem: The pilot light does not illuminate when
the machine is running. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28

Section 10 Parts
See the Parts Manual
x

This page intentionally left blank.

 1.1

Section 1
Safety
Purpose and Contents of this
Section
4 3
This section gives detailed information
on the safe use of this machine.
This section includes the following 1
topics:

Contents Page
Rules for Safe Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Lockout Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Safety Signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 2
Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Safety System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9

Rules for Safe Operation

 WARNING 3. NEVER put your hand or any foreign
Failure to follow the rules for safe object into the feed area (1) or into
operation could result in serious injury or under the discharge chute (2)!
or death! Any person who operates, See the figure. Serious personal injury
cleans, repairs, adjusts, installs, and/or damage to the machine will
supervises the operation of, or uses result.
this machine in any way must know and
follow all safety rules and operating 4. NEVER attempt to assist the feeding
principles in this manual! or discharging of product with your
hands or an implement!
1. This machine contains sharp knives
and rotating parts. Never operate this 5. Always disconnect and lock out the
machine if any guard or safety device power source and verify that the
has been opened, removed, or motor will not start before doing any
modified; doing so can result in serious work on this machine. The disconnect
injury or amputation. switch handle (3) on the electrical
enclosure (4) is used to lock out
2. Sharp edges and pinch points are power. Start and stop buttons are on
exposed when guards are opened or the enclosure.
removed. Use extreme caution to
avoid touching or striking these areas (continued on the next page)
with your hands or body.
1.2 Section 1
Safety
Rules for Safe Operation
(continued from the previous page)
6. Only qualified trained personnel
should clean, adjust, operate, repair or
maintain the machine. Detailed
cleaning and maintenance procedures
are included in this manual.
7. This machine contains a safety
system that must be tested regularly
by qualified, trained personnel. If the
test indicates a problem with the
system, this machine is not safe to
operate. Call maintenance personnel
or a qualified electrician immediately to
locate and repair the fault. Complete
information on checking the safety
system is found in this section of the
manual.
8. The machine is supplied with a
special tool, called a release tool, for
unlocking the guard locking
switches if power to the machine
has been removed. The release tool
should be in the possession of and
used by authorized personnel only!
Never use this tool to unlock the guard
locking switches while cutting parts are
rotating! Improper use could result in
serious injury such as amputation! See
Section 5: Routine Maintenance and
Cleaning.
9. Should the machine become
overloaded or jammed, DO NOT
attempt to correct the problem with the
power source on. Disconnect and lock
out the power source. Detailed
instructions for correcting product
jamming are found in Section 4
Operation and should be read and
understood by all maintenance,
service, or operation personnel.
10.If your machine does not have safety
signs and protective devices, you
must not operate the machine.
Safety signs and other protective
devices are placed on the machine to
help you avoid personal injury. They
are there for your protection. Notify
your supervisor and contact Urschel if
these parts are missing, modified or
damaged. For the part numbers,
languages and locations of safety
signs, see Section 10 Parts: Safety
Signs and Machine Labels.
11. This machine has two disconnect
switches inside the electrical
enclosure. The disconnect switch with
the operating handle on the outside of
the electrical enclosure is used to
remove power from the motor and
starting control circuit. This disconnect
switch handle is referred to in the
Lockout Procedure and elsewhere in
the manual where disconnecting power
is required for machine maintenance.
See Section 8 Electrical System
before maintenance personnel open
the electrical enclosure. This section
contains information on the function of
the additional disconnect switch.
 Section 1 1.3
Safety

Lockout Procedure
 WARNING
5
Always follow the lockout procedure
1 4 2
before opening any guard! Failure to
lockout the power disconnect switch
could result in accidental start-up and 3
severe injury!

1. If the machine is running, push the

stop button (1).

2. Turn the disconnect switch handle

(2) off and lock out. Use the padlock
(3) attached to the enclosure to lock
the switch, or lock the switch according
to your plant policy on energy lockout
procedures.

3. Verify that the machine will not start.

If the emergency stop button (4) was
pushed, rotate and pull out to reset.
After rotating parts have stopped, press
the start button (5) and hold for two
seconds. The machine should not start.
1.4 Section 1
Safety

Safety Signs
1
 WARNING
If the machine does not have safety signs,
you must not operate the machine! Failure
to follow the instructions on the signs
could result in serious injury such as
amputation! Replace any missing or
damaged signs and follow their
instructions.

See Section 5 Routine Maintenance and

Cleaning for information on replacing
safety signs.

A caution label (1) is provided to

remind you of safety rules which must be
2
DANGER
PELIGRO
followed to avoid personal injury.
DO NOT PUT HANDS INTO FEED OPENING.

Danger labels (2) are placed at or near NO PONER LA MANO DENTRO DE LA

the feed opening to warn you and anyone

11662 ABERTURA DE ALIMENTACION.

near the machine that this opening is an

DANGER
access to sharp rotating parts and pinch
3
points which can cause serious injury.
Never insert your hand, a tool, or any

PELIGRO
DO NOT PUT HANDS INTO OR UNDER

foreign object into the feed opening.

DISCHARGE CHUTE.

Danger labels (3) are placed on or near

NO PONER LA MANO DENTRO O BAJO
EL CONDUCTO DE DESCARGA.

the discharge chute to warn you and

11663

anyone near the machine that this opening 3

is an access to sharp rotating parts and
pinch points which can cause serious
injury. Never insert your hand, a tool, or
any foreign object into the discharge
chute.

Danger labels (4) are visible when a

protective guard has been opened or
removed. This label warns you that the
machine is unguarded and must not be
restarted until all covers and guards are
replaced. 4
 Section 1 1.5
Safety

A danger label (1) and a hazard alert 1 2

label (2) are placed on the electrical
enclosure to warn you that this is a source
of electrical hazard. The enclosure must
be opened and serviced by a qualified
electrician only and the installation must
meet applicable codes. The number on the
hazard alert label indicates the voltage
requirements of the machine.

A warning label (3) is placed near the

guard locking switch to warn you that the 3
manual release should never be used to
unlock the switch while cutting parts are
rotating. See Section 5 Routine
Maintenance and Cleaning for additional
information on the manual release.

A label (4) is placed near the guard

locking switch to illustrate that the guard
cannot be opened unless the red LED is
lit.

A label (5) is placed on the machine

frame to illustrate that this area is not to
be used as a step. 4

5
1.6 Section 1
Safety

Protective Devices 4
3
 WARNING
Do not defeat, tamper with, remove,
modify, or bypass these protective 2
devices! Severe personal injury such as
amputation could result.
1
The power disconnect switch handle (1),
located on the electrical enclosure,
eliminates the danger of accidental
start-up when locked in the off position.
The disconnect switch also serves as an
emergency stop switch.
The stop button (2) shuts down the
machine when pressed and is the
recommended stopping method.
The emergency stop button (3)
provides rapid access to shut down the
machine in an emergency. The starting
circuit will remain interrupted (open) until
the button is rotated and pulled out. The
emergency stop button is monitored by a
safety relay which shuts down the 5
machine if the button fails.
The pilot light (4) illuminates when the
motor is running.
Certain parts that cover areas of the
machine are referred to as guards (5).
Guards include exterior and interior sheet
6
metal parts, and may be hinged or bolted
in place. Guards enclose potentially
dangerous machine areas. 8
Guard locking switches (6) are
provided on certain protective guards to
lock the guards and prevent access to
potentially hazardous machine areas while
cutting parts are rotating. A guard locking 7
switch is also provided on the machine
frame. The switch actuator (7) is held in 8
place by a bracket on a standard machine.
In the event that the discharge opening
requires modification, a chain and
bracket (8) are provided for attachment to
additional guarding or a product collection
device. See Section 3 Installation for
important information on additional
guarding.
 Section 1 1.7
Safety
The discharge extension (1) is
fastened to the feed cover to deter access
to the cutting parts. The extension places
the discharge opening at a height from the
floor that discourages an operator from
easily reaching into the opening. In the
event that the warning signs on the
discharge chute are ignored, the extension
also increases the distance from the
discharge opening to the cutting parts. The
extension is attached with tamper-
resistant fasteners (2). Special tools for 1
these fasteners are supplied with the
machine and are for use by authorized
personnel only. 2
 WARNING
If your machine was originally equipped
with a discharge extension and it has
been removed or modified, you must
take action to properly guard the
discharge area. Using the machine
without the extension and not properly
guarded can lead to serious injury such
as amputation! See Section 3 Installation
for information on additional guarding or
contact Urschel to discuss options for
guarding the discharge area.

(continued on the following page)

1.8 Section 1
Safety

Protective Devices (continued)

The feed hopper extension (1) is

provided to deter access by an operator to
the rotating impeller and cutting parts. In
the event that the warning signs on the 1
feed hopper are ignored, the extension
places the entry point into the feed
opening at a distance where these parts
are not easily reached.
 WARNING
If the feed hopper extension has been
removed or modified, you must take
action to properly guard the feed area.
Using the machine without the extension
and not properly guarded can lead to
serious injury such as amputation! See
Section 3 Installation for information on
additional guarding or contact Urschel to
discuss options for guarding the feed
area.
A protective sleeve (2) is provided with
the machine for placement on the crosscut
spindle when handling or working near the
exposed cutting parts.
Protective gloves (3) are provided with
the machine for use when handling or 2
working near exposed cutting parts. Use
according to the manufacturer’s
instructions; see the label attached to the
glove. Gloves are available in several
sizes; see Section 10 Parts: Tools. 3

 WARNING
Using gloves with inadequate cut
resistance can lead to injury. The gloves
supplied with the machine are rated for
cut resistance; do not use gloves with a
lesser rating. The gloves are not cut
proof; use care when handling knives.
 Section 1 1.9
Safety

Daily Safety System Test

 WARNING
Only a qualified trained person should
perform this test. Any problems
detected as a result of this test must be 1
repaired by a qualified electrician
before operating the machine! DO NOT
operate the machine if problems are
detected or serious injury such as
amputation could result!

The purpose of this test is to verify the

function of each switch and control
component in the safety system. Perform 2
this test daily. If the machine is not in
continuous operation, test before each use.
The person performing the test must be
familiar with the different guards and 3
controls on the machine. See Section 4
Operation and Section 5 Routine
Maintenance and Cleaning.
The machine is equipped with guard
locking switches (1) with actuator keys
(2). The switches work in conjunction with
a standstill monitor (3) located in the
electrical enclosure.

(continued on the following page)

1.10 Section 1
Safety

Daily Safety System Test

(continued)

1. Verify that the machine is operating 3

correctly with all guards in place.
Turn the disconnect switch handle on. 2
The manual release (1) on each guard
locking switch must be in the “lock”
position. Use the release tool (2)
supplied with the machine if necessary 1
to turn the manual release. (See
Section 5 Routine Maintenance and
Cleaning for additional information on
the manual release and release tool.)
The red status light (3) should be lit.
 WARNING
Never use the manual release to unlock
the guard locking switch while cutting
parts are rotating! Improper use of the
manual release could result in serious
injury such as amputation!

2. Push the start button and hold for two

seconds. The machine should start and
the pilot light should illuminate. Push
the emergency stop button and turn the
disconnect switch handle off. Visually
verify that the machine has come to a
complete stop. Twist and pull out on
the emergency stop button to reset.
 WARNING
Avoid contact with cutting parts and
sharp edges exposed during this test!
 Section 1 1.11
Safety

3. Test the electrical circuit for the

guard locking switches. Test each
switch individually. Unfasten the guard
and open so that the actuator is out of 1
the guard locking switch, but no further
3
as shown. All other guards must be
closed and latched. Turn the
disconnect switch handle on, push the
start button and hold for two seconds. 2
The machine should not start. If the
machine does start, the guard locking
switch circuit has failed. Push the
emergency stop button, disconnect and
lock out the power source and close
the feed cover. Call a qualified
electrician to locate and repair the fault
immediately.
Perform this test at each of the
following switch locations.
Switch number 1: unfasten the
latch (1) on the feed cover and open to
5
the point where the actuator (2) is out
of the guard locking switch (3).
Switch number 2: unfasten the
latch handle (4) on the hinged back 4
cover and open to the point where the
actuator (5) is out of the guard locking
switch.
Switch number 3: the guard
locking switch (6) is mounted to the
frame leg. The machine is supplied 6
with a bracket (7) to hold the actuator
in place. Testing the switch in this
condition is not necessary. 6
If the discharge chute extension has
been removed, use the chain and
bracket (8) supplied with the machine
to attach the actuator to additional 7
guarding or a product take away device
as described in Section 3 Installation.
Remove the actuator and push the start
button as described above; the 8
machine should not start.

(continued on the following page)

1.12 Section 1
Safety

Daily Safety System Test

(continued)

4. Test the internal mechanical latch in 1

the guard locking switch. With the
feed cover closed and latched, press
the start button and hold for two
seconds. The machine should start.
Unfasten the latch (1) and attempt to
open the feed cover (do not exceed the
force normally used to open the cover).
The cover should not open. Refasten
the latch.
If you can open the cover the guard
locking switch has failed. Push the stop
button, disconnect and lock out the
power source and close the feed cover.
Call a qualified electrician to locate and
repair the fault immediately.
Repeat the test for the switches on
the support housing door and frame
leg.

5. Test the manual release on the guard 3

2
locking switch. Use the release tool
(2) to turn the manual release (3) to
the unlock position. Check that the
emergency stop button has been reset;
twist and pull out to reset. Press the
start button and hold for two seconds.
The machine should not start. If the
machine starts, the guard locking
switch has failed. Push the stop button,
disconnect and lock out the power
source. Call a qualified electrician to
replace the switch immediately. Repeat
the test on the other switches.

Section 2
General Information
Contents of this Section
Contents Page
Specifications, Applications, Product Input Limitations . . . . . 2.1
Noise Emission, Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Sizes and Types of Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Specifications
Dimensions and Weights:
Length: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70.31" (1786 mm)
Width: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.30" (1481 mm)
Height: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.95" (1548 mm)
Net Weight: . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 lbs. (454 kg)
See Section 10 Parts: Dimensional Drawing.
Materials of Construction: stainless steel
in the product contact areas.
Electrical Enclosure: constructed of
stainless steel, NEMA 4X and IP 66 rated;
available with a soft start for single speed
operation or a variable frequency drive (VFD) to
operate the motor at different speeds (3 hp
motor only).
Motor: 1.5 hp (1.1 kW) soft start, 3 hp
(2.2 kW) soft start, or 3 hp (2.2 kW) with
VFD (variable frequency drive), totally
enclosed, fan-cooled, stainless steel.
Minimum rating: IP 56. See the motor
specification plate and motor manufacturer’s
instructions for more information.
2.1
 WARNING
Modifying this machine can lead to serious
injury such as amputation! Modifications
include, but are not limited to, cutting or
omitting guards, elevating the machine and
overspeeding the cutting parts. Do not
modify this machine, unless the machine
will be installed in a production line as
described in Section 3 Installation.
Applications
The Sprint 2 Dicer will cut uniform dices,
strips, and slices from a variety of products
such as potatoes, tomatoes, carrots, celery,
turnips, rutabagas, sugar beets, pineapple
and breads. A wide selection of
interchangeable cutting parts enable the
user to obtain cuts through a wide range of
sizes at high production capacities. The
machine features continuous operation for
uninterrupted production, and simplified
design for easy cleanup and maintenance.
Product Input Limitations
Maximum input product size is 6-1/2"
(165 mm) in any dimension when using the 4
paddle impeller and 4" (100 mm) when using
the 7 paddle impeller.
Products which are explosive or
create a potentially explosive atmosphere
should not be processed by this machine.
A potentially explosive atmosphere could
be created if processing your product
creates fumes or dust in sufficient
concentrations.
2.2 Section 2
General Information

Noise Emission 1 2
39.37"
The amount of noise generated by this (1000 mm)
machine in use will vary depending on the
type, condition and volume of product being
cut, the size of cut and the acoustical
characteristics of the room in which the
machine is installed. A machine in good
condition will register approximately 100
dB(A) in a free field over a reflecting plane
when run at 70 hertz without product and
set to produce 1/8" (3.2 mm) dices. Sound is
measured at a height of 63" (1600 mm) from
the floor and 39.37" (1000 mm) from the
machine. Maximum sound position (1)
occurs at a point near the electrical
enclosure (2) on a standard height machine.
The figure at the right shows a top view and
the maximum sound position. A machine
using a crosscut knife spindle that produces a
larger dimension cut, used without a crosscut
spindle, or operating at other speeds will
generate less noise when measured under
similar conditions.
8
9
Operating Principle
10
Product (3) is delivered to a feed hopper,
then enters a rotating impeller (4). The 7
resulting centrifugal force holds the product
against the inside of the case (5). Impeller 6
paddles carry the product past the slicing
knife (6). An adjustable slice gate (7) at the
top of the case allows the product to move 3
outward across the edge of the slicing knife. 4
The distance between the end of the slice
gate and the slicing knife edge determines
the slice thickness.
As the slices emerge, they are guided
between the slicing knife and stripper
plate (8) before entering the circular 5
knives (9) where they are cut into strips.
The strips pass directly into the crosscut
knives (10) where the final cut is made.
 Section 2 2.3
General Information

Sizes and Types of Cuts 1

The machine will produce dices (1),
strip cuts (2) and slices (3). Cuts can be
made with straight knives in all dimensions
or crinkle knives in the slice and crosscut
dimensions.
Slice thickness: 3/32"–1"
(2.4–25.4 mm).
Circular knife spindle: 1/8"–1"
(3.2–25.4 mm) with standard spindle 2
assemblies and larger sizes with custom
knife arrangements.
Crosscut knife spindle: 3/32"–1"
(2.0–25.4 mm).
Crinkle cuts measure .300" (7.6 mm)
from peak-to-peak (4) and .076" (1.9 mm)
deep (5). The overall thickness is the
depth of the crinkle plus the nominal
product thickness (6). Crinkle knives at
the slice and crosscut locations are used
to produce crinkle French fry strips. 3

6 5

4 .076" (1.9mm)
2.4 Section 2
General Information

This page intentionally left blank.

 3.1

Section 3
Installation
Purpose and Contents of this 1 2
Section

The purpose of this section is to instruct

qualified maintenance personnel in proper
lifting, mounting, installing the electrical
supply and safeguarding the machine.
This section includes the following
topics:

Contents Page Machine Shipment

Machine Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Guard Locking Switch Status for Shipment,
Every Urschel machine is fully inspected
Planning Installation of the Machine, Location. . . . . . . . . 3.2
Lifting the Machine, Machine with Casters. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 and test-run before it is shipped. Spare
Electrical Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 parts, required tools, an instruction
Installing the Machine with Product Feeding and manual and other important information
Collection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 are packed in separate boxes and shipped
The Feed Opening, The Discharge Opening. . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 in the crate with the machine.
Installing Product Feeding and Collection Devices . . . . . . . 3.8
Customizing the Feed Hopper Extension and
The machine may be shipped with a
Discharge Chute Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 feed cover plate (1) in place of the hopper
Minimum Safe Reach Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 extension and fastened over the feed
Requirements for Additional Guarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 opening. Remove the plate and install the
Elevated or Lowering the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 hopper extension (2).
Risk Assessment Before Using a Machine in Production,
Repurpose or Resale of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16  WARNING
Do not operate the machine without the
hopper extension! Failure to install the
hopper extension decreases the
distance to the cutting parts and could
result in serious injury such as
amputation.
3.2 Section 3
Installation
Guard Locking Switch Status for
Shipment
The machine has guard locking
switches (1) which lock the guards closed
during operation. Each switch has a
manual release which is unlocked for
shipment. With the switches unlocked, the
guards can be opened without power to
the machine. Use the release tool (2)
supplied with the machine to turn the
manual release to the lock position. Keep
the release tool in the possession of
authorized personnel. For additional
information, see Section 5 Routine
Maintenance and Cleaning.
NOTICE
The manual release on each guard locking
switch must be in the lock position before
the machine will operate.
Planning Installation of the Machine
Before installation, prepare a plan to make
the use of this machine safe and efficient.
This plan should consider location,
electrical power source and method of
feeding and collecting product. The
installation should comply with all applicable
safety codes and regulations.
1
2
Location
 CAUTION
Processing food products can create
hazardous floor conditions. Provisions
must be made to help prevent the
operator from slipping while moving
around the machine.
Choose a location that provides
machine stability, ample space, and a
clear path on all sides of the machine so
that operators can move safely and easily
in a clean, dry work area. Provide easy
access to the stop and start controls and
the main power disconnect switch. Allow
room for cleaning and maintenance. The
location should provide level footing,
adequate lighting and ventilation and
provisions for excessive noise levels.
Never locate the machine in an area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere.
Urschel Laboratories recommends that
this machine be installed at floor level. If
elevating the machine is unavoidable, all
operation, cleaning, maintenance and safety
features of floor level accessibility must be
maintained. See the following pages for
information on an elevated machine.
 Section 3 3.3
Installation

Lifting the Machine

 WARNING
Secure the machine frame to the lifting
1
forks to prevent tipping. If the machine
tips and falls from the lifting forks,
bodily injury from crushing and damage
to the machine may result.

Moving and lifting the machine must be

done by a qualified forklift operator. Insert
the lifting forks (1) through the fork 2
guides (2) under the frame. Position the
forks far enough under the frame to ensure
stable lifting. Secure the machine frame to
the lifting forks with straps or chains. Both
sides of the machine frame should rest on
the lifting forks.
IMPORTANT 5
Always use the frame to lift or move the
machine, never the electrical enclosure,
covers or guards. These parts may be
damaged by improper lifting. Do not crush
electrical cords when lifting the machine.
6 3
NOTICE 3
The fork guides are for positioning the 4
4
lifting forks only. The guides are not
designed to prevent the load from shifting.
Each swivel caster has a brake that is
Machine with Casters locked by pushing the lever (5) down to the
position shown. Lock both caster brakes
The machine is shipped with the casters except when moving the machine. To
removed from the frame. Attach both release the brake, push the lever to the
stationary casters (3) to the frame legs horizontal position (6).
below the electrical enclosure and both
swivel casters (4) to the legs at the  WARNING
discharge side as shown in the figure. Moving a machine with casters on an
uneven floor can cause the machine to
 WARNING tip! Bodily injury from crushing and
Casters installed in positions other than damage to the machine may occur if the
shown could make the machine more machine tips over. Do not move the
likely to tip while moving! Bodily injury machine over irregularities in the floor,
from crushing and damage to the such as recessed floor drains.
machine may occur if the machine tips
over. Attach casters only as shown.
3.4 Section 3
Installation

Electrical Installation

The electrical installation must be

performed by a qualified electrician in
accordance with all applicable electrical
codes.

1. Use watertight fittings and conduit at 1

the power source entry point (1).
NOTICE
Fittings that are not watertight may lead to
electrical failures. Components that fail due to
water or chemical contamination will not be
covered under the warranty.

2. Verify the power supply. Voltage must

be within ±5% of the voltage specified on
the hazard alert label (2) or the motor
may become overloaded during
operation. A “Y” (3) in the voltage
designation on the label indicates the 2 3
machine contains mini circuit breakers
(MCBs) and requires a Wye power
supply.
To check for a Wye power supply:
Calculate the voltage to ground by
multiplying the supply voltage by .577.
Measure the voltage at each phase to
ground and compare to the calculated
value. For example, at 400 volts, a Wye
supply will measure approximately 230
volts from one phase to ground
(400 x .577). One phase may read 0
volts, which is acceptable. A Delta supply
at 400 volts will measure 400 volts from
one phase to ground.
NOTICE
If the machine is supplied with mini
circuit breakers or requires a Wye power
supply (“Y” in the label) and the voltage
from one phase to ground exceeds 277
volts, contact an Urschel service
representative.
 Section 3 3.5
Installation

3. Connect the outside power source to

the terminals on top of the disconnect 2
1
switch (1) in the upper right corner of
the back panel.

4. Connect the grounding conductor

(green or green and yellow striped wire)
to the earth termination point (2).

 WARNING
This machine can be electrified with
voltages dangerous to life if not
properly grounded! Always maintain an
earth ground to the earth termination
point on this machine.

5. Verify that the impeller (3) rotates

clockwise when viewed through the
feed opening.

6. Securely tighten the quarter turn

3
latches (4) on the electrical enclosure
door when the installation is finished.
NOTICE
An electrical enclosure with a three phase
power line filter may cause a power source
with a ground fault detection device or
residual current device to trip.

4
3.6 Section 3
Installation

Installing the Machine with Product 1

Feeding and Collection Devices
 WARNING
Failure to properly install and provide
safeguards may result in serious injury,
amputation or death. Contact an
Urschel representative with any
questions concerning these installation
instructions.

The standard machine as supplied by

Urschel is ready for use with product
feeding and collection methods compatible
with the feed and discharge openings on 2
the machine.
The feed opening (1) and discharge
opening (2) may require modification by  WARNING
the customer for integration into a Operators must be instructed and
processing line. Modifications may be understand to NEVER place hands or
necessary to ensure the flow of product, tools into the feed and discharge
and help contain and minimize damage to openings when the machine is running.
certain products. Additional guarding may Sharp rotating knives will cause serious
be required as a result of these injury or amputation! Any modification to
modifications. Additional guarding helps the machine must be evaluated and
ensure the safety of operators by detering additional guarding put in place to
access to hazards beyond the feed and prevent operator access to dangerous
discharge openings. Sheet metal covers, areas.
for example, can be added by the
customer to serve as both a product
containment method and to deter access.
Other methods of guarding are also
possible.
 Section 3 3.7
Installation

The Feed Opening

The feed opening on a standard height

machine is designed to deter access by
operators to the rotating impeller (1) and
stationary slicing knife, and also to guide
product to the impeller. Human contact 3
with the impeller and slicing knife may
cause serious injury or amputation. The
machine is equipped with a feed hopper
extension (2). The distance (3) from the
feed opening to the impeller is 30.0" (76
cm). Any modification to this part must be 1
evaluated for the safe reach distance as
described on the following pages.

The Discharge Opening 2

5
The machine is equipped with a
discharge chute extension (4). The
importance of the extension is to deter
human access to the sharp rotating knives
of the crosscut knife spindle (5) by
increasing the distance to the hazardous
area. Human contact with the spindle will 4
cause serious injury or amputation. The 6
distance (6) from the discharge opening
to the crosscut knife spindle is 23.2"
(59 cm); the distance without the
extension is 14.7" (37 cm).
The discharge height (7) is 15" (38 cm)
from the floor on a standard-height 7
machine.
 WARNING
Using the machine without the extension
and not properly guarded can lead to
serious injury such as amputation! If
your machine was originally equipped
with a discharge extension and it has
been removed or modified, you must
take action to properly guard the
discharge area. See the following pages
for information on additional guarding or
contact Urschel to discuss options for
guarding the discharge area.
3.8 Section 3
Installation

Installing Product Feeding and 1 1

Collection Devices

The term “product collection device” is

used to refer to conveyors, flumes, totes
or any other device that collects and
transports discharged product from the
machine. The following example shows a 3
conveyor; the concepts also apply to any
product collection device. 2
Certain installations or applications may
require that the machine be operated with
modified feed and/or discharge openings,
elevated to alter the discharge height from
the floor, or both. Modifications include, 3
but are not limited to, cutting or removal of
the feed hopper extension and discharge
4
chute extension.
In the event that the discharge opening
or machine height is modified, the guard
locking switch (1) on the machine frame
must be used in conjunction with the
product collection device or additional
guarding. The switch actuator is held in
place by a bracket (2) on a standard
machine. If the discharge opening is
modified, the bracket must be removed
and replaced with the bracket, chain and
shackle (3) supplied with the machine. 6
The end of the chain must be secured to
the product collection device by the user.
A machine must be interfaced to the
product collection device using the guard
locking switch in such a way that machine 5
operation is only possible when the
machine discharge chute (4) is
positioned over the product collection
device (5).
The middle figure shows a machine
postioned away from the collection device.
The actuator key (6) is not in the guard
locking switch and the machine cannot
operate. The bottom figure shows a
machine in position over the collection
7
device with the actuator installed in the
guard locking switch (7). The machine
can be operated in this position.
 Section 3 3.9
Installation

The Sprint 2 Dicer and the product

collection device must be designed in
such a way that the machine and product
collection device cannot pivot, slide or
move while the dicer is running. Limiting 1
the machine movement will reduce the
possibility of an operator gaining access to
the rotating knives. Use a mechanical
latch or lock if necessary to ensure that
the machine does not move out of position
while in operation. The illustrations show
the use of guides (1) that serve to prevent
movement of the machine when in position
over a conveyor.
Another option includes a pin (2) and
sleeve (3) arrangement where one or
more pins attached to the product
collection device enter one or more
sleeves on the machine frame when the
machine is in the operating position (4).
NOTICE
The machine must be stationary while in 3
operation. Do not rely on the guard locking
switch and actuator as a means to hold
the machine in position. The switch is not 2
intended for this purpose and if used in
this way may fail prematurely.
NOTICE
The examples in this section are used to
help explain the concepts discussed. Your
installation may require a different
solution. If your company does not have
the expertise to design and install this
equipment, your company must contact a
qualified firm that specializes in safety
4
assessment and design.

3
2
3.10 Section 3
Installation

Customizing the Feed Hopper

Extension and Discharge Chute
Extension 3

The discharge chute extension (1)

and feed hopper extension (2) are 1
fastened to the feed cover (3). Both
extensions can be modified by the 4
customer to fit the requirements of the
feed and product collection devices. For
example, the discharge chute extension
can be cut (4) to fit a sloped conveyor.
One or both extensions can also be
removed and not used. Additional
guarding must be added by the customer
at the feed and discharge openings (see
the following pages). The actuator key 5
from the guard locking switch on the frame
leg must be attached to the product 2
collection device with the chain (5) 3
provided or by similar means.
The discharge chute extension is
attached with tamper-resistant fasteners
(6). Special tools for these fasteners are
supplied with the machine and are for use
by authorized personnel only.
 WARNING
Using the machine without the feed
hopper and discharge chute extensions
and without proper guarding can lead to
6
serious injury such as amputation! Do not
remove the extensions unless the 1
machine is properly modified for use with
a product feed and/or collection device.
Follow the guidelines below for proper
guarding.
 WARNING
IMPORTANT Do not cut the feed cover! Using the
Do not discard the discharge chute machine with a feed cover shortened at
extension. Reattach the extension to the the feed or discharge openings can lead
discharge chute if the machine is not to serious injury such as amputation! If
interlocked to a product collection device the machine cannot be fed or does not
or to restore the machine to the original discharge product properly, consult a
design for other uses. Safety Engineer or an Urschel
representative for other solutions.
 Section 3 3.11
Installation

Minimum Safe Reach Distance

2
One method used to determine the
requirements for additional guarding is
referred to as the minimum safe reach
distance. The minimum safe reach
distance is the distance (1) measured
from the hazardous area (2) to the 1
opening (3) where an operator's hand or
other body part can enter. The hazardous
area is the knife edges in the crosscut
knife spindle assembly. The minimum safe
reach distance is based on the size of the
opening where the operator’s hand or
other body part can enter. 3
The standards listed below provide
guidance for the design and installation of
additional guarding. Consult a qualified
Safety Engineer if necessary.

European Standard: “BS EN ISO

13857:2008: Safety of Machinery - Safety
Distances to Prevent Hazard Zones Being
Reached by Upper and Lower Limbs”

OSHA: 29CFR 1910.217, Table 0-10

ANSI: Safety distances are published in

“ANSI B11.19-2010: Performance Criteria
for Safeguarding”
3.12 Section 3
Installation

Requirements for Additional

Guarding

When the Sprint 2 Dicer and the product

feed and collection devices are in the 22"
1
operational position, additional guarding (56 cm)
may be required to deter operator access
to the feed and discharge openings. The A
purchaser has full responsibility to design
and install the additional guarding. The
additional guarding must maintain a
minimum safe reach distance to ensure
that the hazardous areas are not 2
accessible by operators.
The installation may, for example,
include additional guarding (1) around a
conveyor with one discharge point (2). 3
The size of the opening (3) at the
discharge point dictates the required
minimum safe reach distance, which can
be assessed using the standards listed on
the previous page. In the top illustration,
the dimension from the bottom of the
discharge chute to the hazardous area is
shown. Dimension A will vary based on 4
the size of the opening at the discharge
A
point. Typically, the larger the opening, the
greater the value of the minimum safe
reach distance.
The middle illustration shows a sloped
conveyor and a discharge chute extension
2
that has been cut at an angle to
accommodate a conveyor. The distance
(4) from the bottom of the discharge chute
extension to the hazardous area must be
determined. Additional guarding is 3
constructed with sufficient length
(dimension A) so that the reach distance is
acceptable.
Additional guarding or barriers may be
required if the feed area is modified.
Maintain the minimum safe reach
distance (5) from the feed opening to the
rotating impeller that is present on an 5
unmodified machine. 30.0"
(76 cm)
 Section 3 3.13
Installation

The illustration at the right shows a

discharge chute over a water flume (1)
without any additional safeguarding. The
opening in this example determines the
minimum safety distance (2). The
opening of the discharge chute would 1
typically require a safety distance that
cannot be easily achieved. In the next
illustration, an additional guard (3) is
bolted to the water flume. To come in
contact with the cutting parts, an operator 2
must lean over the flume, reach into the
water and under the additional guard. This
type of reach-over design and safety
distances are addressed in the ANSI and
the European standards.

(continued on the following page)

3
3.14 Section 3
Installation

Requirements for Additional

Guarding (continued) 1

The illustrations show a machine

installation with totes (1) as the
product collection device. One 3
method to ensure that the
discharge opening is not
accessible to an operator makes
use of a tunnel (2). Totes can be
pushed through without stopping
the machine. To achieve the safest
installation, use sensors (3)
interfaced to the machine's
electrical circuit that will not allow 2
the machine to operate unless
totes are in the tunnel. The other
option shown uses actuators (4)
fastened to each tote and guides
to keep the tote in position when
the machine is operating.
The illustrations on these pages are
examples of ways to safeguard machinery.
Many other solutions are possible. If your
company does not have the expertise to
design and install this equipment, a
qualified firm that specializes in safety
design and assessments must be 1
contacted.

4

Elevating or Lowering the Machine
The machine design and a floor level
installation are intended to minimize the
likelihood of an operator reaching the
rotating knives and impeller. In the event
that the warning signs on the discharge
chute are ignored, a deliberate action
must be taken by the operator to take a
position under the discharge chute and
reach into the opening to come into
contact with the knives. An operator at the
feed opening must take a deliberate action
to stand on a ladder or elevated platform
to reach the impeller and knife.
Elevating or lowering the machine alters
the relationship of the feed opening and
discharge opening to an operator.
Installing the machine with an interlocked
collection device and additional guarding
as described in this section will minimize
or eliminate the potential hazard created
by altering the height of the machine.
Section 3 3.15
Installation
Elevating the machine creates
additional hazards in the daily operation,
maintenance and sanitation of the
machine, including ergonomic risks that
are not present on a machine at standard
height. Examples include:
1. Stability of the machine may be
compromised
2. Changing the cutting parts may be more
difficult
3. Feeding product to the machine may be
more difficult
4. Opening and closing guards may be
more difficult
5. Effectiveness of sanitation efforts may be
reduced
To reduce these risks and hazards, the
purchaser must consider building a
working platform that complies with all
state, federal and national requirements.
3.16 Section 3
Installation

Risk Assessment Before Using the

Machine in Production

After the machine is installed, Urschel

recommends that the user perform a risk
assessment of the installation to assure
that no additional hazards have been
created.

Repurpose or Resale of the

Machine

If the machine is removed from the

original application for placement in a
different application, the new installation
must be evaluated and additional guarding
added if necessary. If a modified machine
enters the used machinery market, include
all original parts, such as the actuator,
chain and bracket, and the feed hopper
and discharge chute extensions on a
machine originally equipped with these
parts. Reattach the feed hopper and
discharge chute extensions to the feed
cover if possible if the machine is removed
from the production line for other uses or
for resale.
 WARNING
Failure to properly install and provide
safeguards may allow an operator to
come in contact with the cutting parts,
result in serious injury, amputation or
death. If the machine is no longer used
with the original collection device, the
new installation must be evaluated and
additional guarding added if necessary.
 4.1

Section 4
Operation
Purpose and Contents of this Safety Considerations before
Section Operating the Machine

The purpose of this section is to instruct All operators must have a thorough
an operator in proper starting, stopping, understanding of the safe operation of this
feeding and clearing of product from the machine. See Section 1 Safety. The safety
cutting parts in case of a jam or overload. system must be tested and in working order.
This section includes the following All guards must be securely in place and
topics: latched before operating the machine.

Contents Page
Safety Considerations before Operating the Machine . . . . . 4.1  WARNING
Start up Procedure, Stopping Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Feeding Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
This machine contains sharp knives
Speed Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 and rotating parts. Only qualified
Motor Overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 trained personnel should operate this
Correcting a Product Jam in the Cutting Parts, machine. Operating this machine in an
Method to Clear a Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 unsafe manner could result in serious
injury such as amputation!

 WARNING
A qualified trained person must check
the safety system for proper function
before operating the machine. If the
machine is operated without this
system functioning properly, serious
injury such as amputation could result!
4.2 Section 4
Operation

Start-up Procedure 6
1. All foreign objects and product must
be removed from the feed area (1). All 5
guards must be securely in place. 7 4
3
2. Unlock and remove the padlock (2)
from the disconnect switch handle (3)
located on the electrical enclosure. If the 2
emergency stop button (4) was 9
previously pushed, it must be reset; 8
1
rotate and pull out to reset.

3. Turn the disconnect switch handle on

(I).

4. Press the start button (5) and hold for

two seconds. The pilot light (6) will
illuminate when the start button is
pushed.

5. Let the machine reach full operating

speed before feeding product (about five
seconds).

6. If the machine does not start, see

Section 9 Troubleshooting.
Stopping Procedure
 WARNING
Never attempt to open or remove the
guards while the machine is running!
Contact with exposed rotating parts
may cause severe injury such as
amputation!
1. Stop feeding product. This allows
remaining product to be cut and
discharged.
2. When appropriate for the product,
flush the feed area thoroughly with a
generous amount of water before
stopping the machine.
3. Push the stop button (7).
4. Turn the disconnect switch handle
off (O). Lock out the handle with the
padlock or in accordance with your
plant policy on energy lock out
procedures.
5. If the guards are to be opened, verify
that the machine will not start. Press
the start button (5) and hold for two
seconds. The red status light (8) on
each guard locking switch (9) should
be lit, indicating that all rotating
machine parts are idle.
 Section 4 4.3
Operation

Feeding Method
 DANGER
Never place hands into the feed
opening! The feed area contains sharp
knives and rotating parts which can
cause serious injury such as
amputation!
 CAUTION
Do not allow foreign material such as
metal, stone or wood to enter the feed
area. Parts will be damaged and the
product contaminated.

The feeding method affects the quality

and capacity of the finished product. A
steady, uniform flow of properly sized
product from a conveyor or similar feeding
system yields the best quality and greatest
capacity. Dumping large quantities of
product into the feed opening will produce
undesirable cuts and can overload the
motor, clog the feed opening or jam the
cutting unit. Continuous overfeeding or
jamming will also cause premature damage
and failure of machine components. For
best results, products entering the feed area
should not exceed 6-1/2" (165 mm) in any
dimension when using the 4 paddle impeller
and 4" (100 mm) when using the 7 paddle
impeller.
Except for an emergency, never start or
stop the machine when the cutting unit is full
of product. This puts a tremendous strain on
the motor, bearings and cutting parts. In
addition, product that is cut before the
machine has reached full operating speed
may be of such poor quality that it must be
discarded.
4.4 Section 4
Operation

Speed Settings

The machine is supplied with an electrical

assembly that provides either a soft start for
one motor speed or a variable frequency 2
drive for controlling motor speed.
Machine with a variable frequency 1
drive: speed is controlled by a variable
frequency drive (VFD) located in the
electrical enclosure. The display (1) on the
variable frequency drive is viewed through
the window in the electrical enclosure. The
variable frequency drive is controlled by a Rotating Speed of Cutting Parts,
potentiometer dial (2). The hertz value “F” Machine with a VFD and Standard Pulleys
appears on the display; the higher the value Potentiometer Drive display, Impeller Circular Crosscut
frequency (F) RPM Knife Knife
of “F”, the higher the motor speed (see the Dial Hertz in hertz Spindle Spindle
chart at the right). A machine with a VFD is Setting RPM RPM
equipped with standard drive parts. 9 75.0 F075.0 232 1094 1015
Machine with one motor speed: the 8 71.25 F070.0 217 1021 947
speeds of the cutting parts are altered by 7 67.5
changing pulleys (3) inside the support 6 63.75 F065.0 201 948 880
housing. There are three speeds: standard, 5 60.0 F060.0 186 875 812
high and medium. See the “F0.60” 4 56.25 F055.0 170 802 744
frequency setting in the chart at the right for 3 52.5
the speeds of the cutting parts at standard 2 48.75 F050.0 155 729 677
speed. At high speed, the circular knife 1 45.0 F045.0 139 656 609
spindle rotates faster than the crosscut knife
spindle. At medium speed these spindles
rotate at approximately the same rate. See
Section 10 Drive Parts for part information.
Contact an Urschel representative for the
recommended speed for your application.
3
 WARNING
Do not operate the machine at higher
than recommended speeds! Excessive
speed can distort mechanical parts and
cause metal-to-metal contact. Metal
fragments could be thrown from the
machine and cause serious injury!
 Section 4 4.5
Operation

Motor Overload

If the motor shuts off during operation, it

is likely that it has been overloaded.
Maintenance personnel should first locate
and correct the problem that caused the
overload. 2
Machine with a VFD: the display (1) on
the variable frequency drive, viewed
through the window in the electrical
enclosure, may display codes OL1, OL2 or
OL3. Push the reset button (2), then 1
restart in the normal manner.
Single speed machine: push the reset
button (3), then restart in the normal
manner.
If the motor again shuts off, see Section 9
Troubleshooting.

3
4.6 Section 4
Operation

Correcting a Product Jam in the

Cutting Parts
 DANGER
Never attempt to remove jammed product
while the machine is running! You may
come into contact with cutting parts
which could cause severe injury such as
amputation!
1
1. Push the stop button, then turn the
disconnect switch handle off and lock
out.
Method to Clear a Jam
2. Only qualified trained personnel
should proceed to step 3. The cutting unit may become impacted
with product, or foreign material may have
3. Verify that all parts have stopped. The entered the machine and caused the cutting
impeller should not be turning. unit to jam. If the cutting unit will not easily
rotate, it may be possible to use the large
4. Verify that the machine will not start. combination wrench (1) supplied with the
Push the start button and hold for two machine to rotate the crosscut spindle
seconds. The machine should not start. backwards (clockwise) and clear the cutting
unit. Use this method with the procedure
5. Open or remove the guards to expose outlined above.
the jammed area. For information on
opening guards, see Section 5 Routine
Maintenance and Cleaning: Location of
Guards.

6. Remove the obstruction. Keep hands

away from the cutting parts.

7. Remove all product from the feed

area. Rotate the cutting parts by hand
using the drive belt and check for metal-
to-metal contact. Close or replace all
guards.

8. The machine is ready to restart and

resume feeding product. If proper
feeding procedures are followed, product
will flow evenly into the feed area.
 CAUTION
If the product continues to jam, DO
NOT operate the machine. Contact your
supervisor.
 5.1

Section 5
Routine Maintenance and Cleaning
Purpose and Contents of this
Section  WARNING
This machine contains sharp knives,
This section contains information on rotating parts, and voltages dangerous
procedures that are used daily or on a to life. Only qualified trained personnel
routine basis, such as opening and should perform maintenance duties on
inspecting the guards, cleaning and this machine. Follow all instructions in
lubrication. this manual or serious injury such as
This section includes the following amputation or death could result!
topics:

Contents Page
Lockout Procedure and Safety Precautions Before
Beginning Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Opening a Guard Equipped with a Guard Locking Switch . . 5.3
Location of Guards, Inspecting the Guards. . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Cleaning, Daily Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Safety Signs, Installing Safety Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Recommended Lubricant, Lubrication Points,
Lubrication Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
5.2 Section 5
Routine Maintenance and Cleaning

Lockout Procedure and Safety

Precautions Before Beginning
Maintenance 5
 WARNING 1 4 2
Always follow the lockout procedure
before opening any guard or beginning 3
any maintenance procedure! Failure to
lockout the disconnect switch could
result in accidental start-up and severe
injury!

1. If the machine is running, push the

stop button (1).

2. Turn the disconnect switch handle

(2) off and lock out. Use the padlock
(3) attached to the enclosure to lock
the switch, or lock the switch according
to your plant policy on energy lockout
procedures.

3. Verify that the machine will not start.

If the emergency stop button (4) was
pushed, rotate and pull out to reset.
After rotating parts have stopped, press
the start button (5) and hold for two
seconds. The machine should not start.
 Section 5 5.3
Routine Maintenance and Cleaning

Opening a Guard Equipped with a

Guard Locking Switch 1 2

Guards enclose potentially dangerous

machine areas. Follow the procedure below
to open a guard equipped with a guard
locking switch.

1. The disconnect switch handle on the

electrical enclosure must be off and 4
3
locked out. See the lockout procedure
on the previous page.

2. Verify that the incoming power 2

supply is on. Check the status light
(1) on a guard locking switch. The red
LED (light emitting diode) should be
illuminated. A label (2) near each
switch indicates that the guard can be
opened when the LED is lit. If the
machine is disconnected or unplugged
from the power source, see Step 3.
The guard locking switch must have
power to operate and release the
guards. Power is supplied to the guard 4. Unfasten and open the guards to
locking switch circuit when external service the various areas of the
power is coming into the machine, machine. See the following page for a
even though the disconnect switch list of guards that can be opened or
handle on the enclosure is off. removed.

3. If the machine is not connected to a 5. After maintenance procedures are

power source, the guard locking
switch can be unlocked with the
release tool (3). Rotate the manual
release (4) to the unlock position.
 WARNING
Never use the manual release to unlock
a guard locking switch while cutting
parts are rotating! An unlocked switch
allows a guard to open while cutting
parts are rotating. Contact with rotating
cutting parts could result in serious
injury such as amputation! Keep the
release tool in the possession of and
for use by authorized personnel only.
complete, close and replace all guards
and fasten the latches. The manual
release on the guard locking switch
must be in the locked position.
 CAUTION
Fasten the latches when guards are
closed. Do not use the guard locking
switch as a means to hold guards
closed. The switch is not intended for
this purpose and if used in this way
may fail prematurely.
5.4 Section 5
Routine Maintenance and Cleaning
Location of Guards
 WARNING
Do not attempt to operate this machine if
any guard is opened or removed!
Operating the machine with guards
opened or removed may result in serious
injury such as amputation!
Certain parts that cover areas of the
machine are referred to as guards. Guards
include exterior and interior sheet metal
parts, and may be hinged or bolted in
place.
Feed cover, discharge (1): this cover
includes the feed opening and discharge
chute and is opened to access the cutting
parts. The cover is hinged with a draw
latch (2) to fasten the feed cover to the
support housing (3). The cover generally
does not require removal.
Discharge chute extension (4): the
extension fastens to the discharge chute
with special fasteners. See Section 3
Installation for additional information.
Hinged back cover (5): this guard is
opened to access the drive parts. The
cover is hinged and equipped with a guard
locking switch. The status lights on the
switch can be viewed through the access
slot in the cover. To open the cover, turn
the handle (6). The cover generally does
not require removal for any maintenance
or cleaning procedure.
Inner baffle (7): this guard is bolted in
place and generally does not require
removal.
Slice gate guard (8): this guard is
fastened to the slice gate and does not
require removal.
Hopper extension (9): this guard is
bolted in place and generally does not
require removal.
Inspecting the Guards
Inspect all guards for damage. Bent or
twisted parts will not fit on the machine
properly and may prevent the switch
components from lining up. Guards that
have been modified may create an unsafe
condition by allowing access to hazardous
areas. Repair the guards or replace if
necessary.
 Section 5 5.5
Routine Maintenance and Cleaning

9
2
3

6
5
4

7
5.6 Section 5
Routine Maintenance and Cleaning
Cleaning
Product and chemically reactive juices
must be removed completely from parts to
prevent corrosion. Also, product that
remains in the cutting unit may harden
making future cleaning difficult and
encouraging bacterial growth. Heavy
product build-up on cutting parts can
reduce cutting efficiency and cause the
loss of critical tolerances and clearances.
The selection of cleaning agents or their
solution strength will depend on the
application or process in which the
machine is involved. Consult your cleaning
materials supplier for selecting and using
the proper cleaning agent to meet the
sanitizing requirements for your process.
Use cleaning supplies that are suitable for
use with 300 series, 400 series and
17-4PH stainless steels. Excessive
solution strength and soaking time or
excessive soaking time alone may
chemically harm or destroy these and
other materials. Solutions containing
chlorine or acids can also be harmful.
IMPORTANT
Failure to completely remove cleaning
chemicals with an appropriate rinse will
cause parts to corrode.
Daily Cleaning Procedures
NOTICE
The customer must determine the
frequency of cleaning, the extent of
disassembly and the cleaning process.
Urschel cannot make specific
recommendations as different products
have unique cleaning requirements. The
cleaning method should comply with
government regulations and industry best
practices. Consult a sanitarian or
Sanitation Engineer for guidance if
necessary.
Only qualified trained personnel should
clean the machine. Consult your company
policy regarding proper cleaning/sanitizing
solutions and required frequency of cleaning.
NOTICE
Never use abrasive cleaners, metal tools,
wire brushes or sandpaper to clean any
parts. Scrape with wooden or plastic tools
if necessary.
1. Clean the outside of the machine
with water.
NOTICE
Do not direct a stream of water at the
electrical enclosure or electrical
connections. Water entering the enclosure
could cause electrical failure and void the
warranty.
2. Start the machine and flush product
from the cutting parts. Direct a
stream of water or cleaning solution
into the feed opening while the
machine is running.
 WARNING
Do not insert a hose or cleaning tools
into the feed or discharge openings
when the machine is running! Inserting
tools could create an entanglement
hazard and cause serious injury.
Maintain a safe distance while cleaning.
3. Stop the machine. Turn the power
disconnect switch off and lock out.
After the machine has come to a
complete stop, press the start button to
verify that the machine will not start
before opening or removing any guard.

Routine Maintenance and Cleaning
4. Remove and disassemble the
cutting parts. See Section 7 Service
and Repair. Thoroughly wash all
cutting parts with water or an
appropriate cleaning solution. If
cleaning solutions are used, rinse
thoroughly.
5. Clean the remaining portion of the
machine. A forceful stream of water
will remove most of the product. Use
cleaning solutions when necessary and
rinse thoroughly.
Safety Signs
 WARNING
Safety signs are placed on the machine
to help users avoid personal injury. If
the machine does not have these signs
or if they are no longer legible do not
use the machine. Install or replace the
signs immediately.
Inspect all safety signs on the machine
for damage. Damaged, loose, illegible or
missing signs must be replaced. See
Section 10 Parts: Safety Signs and
Machine Labels for sign placement and part
number information.
Section 5 5.7
Installing Safety Signs
1. Clean mounting surfaces. Remove all
traces of old sign material and
adhesives, oils, cleaning material and
water. Remove any nicks or burrs. For
machines in cold room temperature,
warm the mounting surface so that the
label will adhere properly.
2. Wipe the mounting surface of the
machine with isopropyl alcohol.
(Consult the manufacturer’s Material
Safety Data Sheet for proper handling
of isopropyl alcohol.) Apply the label to
a dry, lint free mounting surface.
Remove the sign backing layer. Align
the label and press one end down, then
roll the remaining portion down to avoid
air bubbles. For maximum bond
strength, rub the mounted label with a
clean dry cloth and apply moderate
heat (100–130°F, 38–54°C). The
adhesive is fully cured in 24 hours.
5.8 Section 5
Routine Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommended Lubricant

Use a food grade lubricant that is non- 1

toxic, sanitary and approved for incidental
food contact. The lubricant recommended
for the bearings is listed as H-1 by the
N.S.F./U.S.D.A., and may be purchased
from Urschel in cartridges. See Section 10
Parts: Tools.

Lubrication Points

Four grease fittings (1) are located on

the support housing. These fittings are for
lubrication of the bearing spindles inside
the support housing. The machine may be
equipped with an optional circular support
assembly with grease fittings. To access
these fittings, open the feed cover.
The motor has sealed bearings and can
not be lubricated.
Lubrication Schedule
IMPORTANT
Operating in high ambient temperatures
(100°F/38°C) may cause bearing and gear
failure. Do not over grease the bearing
spindles; over greasing further increases
the temperature of the spindle. Contact
Urschel for more information about
operating in high temperature
environments.

Lubricate the bearing spindles through NOTICE

the grease fittings on the front of the Grease applied to fasteners and machined
support housing with 1-2 pumps from a surfaces during maintenance procedures
grease gun every 75-100 hours of prevents galling as parts are assembled,
operation. For a machine equipped with and eases future disassembly. Parts that
the circular support assembly with grease require grease are identified in the
fittings, lubricate after cleanup to force maintenance section of this manual; use a
cleaning solutions from the bearings. food grade grease.
IMPORTANT
Do not exceed the recommended
lubrication amount and interval! Excessive
lubrication can cause heat build-up and
bearing failure.
 6.1

Section 6
Machine Setup
Purpose and Contents of this Factors Affecting the Output
Section
Several factors must be considered for
The purpose of this section is to successful production results. Once the
describe the parts and settings used on size and type of cut is determined, some
the machine to produce various types of factors to consider include input product
cuts. Because products vary greatly, these size, temperature, compressibility and
are general guidelines. toughness. The nature of the product will
This section includes the following help determine the type of cutting parts
topics: and speed to use. The following topics
explain the options available.
Contents Page
Product Testing Laboratories, Factors Affecting the Output Electrical Assemblies, Motor
Electrical Assemblies, Motor Horsepower and
Speed Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Horsepower and Speed Control
Selecting Parts for Dicing, Options
Strip Cutting and Slicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Slicing Case and Slice Gate, Impellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 The electrical assembly is supplied with
Slicing Knife Holders and Insert Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 a variable frequency drive to control motor
One-Piece Slicing Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 speed or a soft start for operating the
Features of Slicing Knives and Slicing Knife Holders . . . . . . 6.6
Circular Support Assemblies, Fastening Posts . . . . . . . . . 6.7
motor at a single speed. The motor is
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 available in 1.5 and 3 hp (1.1 or 2.2 kW).
Feed Discs and Feed Spindle Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 The variable frequency drive is supplied
Stripper Plates, Primary Stripper Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 with a 3 hp motor only.
Stripper Plate Spacers and Shims for The speeds of the cutting parts on a
Primary Stripper Plates, Secondary Stripper Plates and machine with a soft start are altered by
Cut-off Stripper Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
changing the pulleys. Standard speed is
Shredding Spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 generally used for dicing 1/2" (12.7 mm)
and larger and high speed for 1/2" and
Product Testing Laboratories smaller. Other pulleys can be used to
change the speed of individual spindles.
Your product can be test run at an Several factors may influence the choice
Urschel test facility. Because products of speeds; contact an Urschel
vary widely, Urschel strongly recommends representative for recommendations.
that your specific product be sent to one of
our fully equipped test facilities. Trained
technicians can recommend the best
setup to produce the desired results.
Urschel has a network of test facilities
and experienced service and sales
representatives around the world. Contact
your local Urschel representative to
schedule a comprehensive test. Testing is
free of charge and confidential.
6.2 Section 6
Machine Setup

Selecting Parts for Dicing, Strip 5

Cutting and Slicing 6 7
3
The machine can be set up to produce
three dimensional dices, two dimensional
strip cuts, or slices. See Section 10 Parts:
Slicing and Strip Cutting Parts for 4
illustrations of each setup.
To set up the machine for dicing, the
following items must be selected:
• impeller (1),
• slice case (2),
• slice gate (3),
• slicing knife (4), 1 2
• circular knife spindle assembly (5),
• stripper plate (6) and related parts,
• crosscut knife spindle assembly (7),
• operating speed.
The following topics in this section explain
the options for each selection.
Two dimensional strip cuts are made by
removing either the circular knife spindle
or the crosscut knife spindle. If the
crosscut knife spindle is used, the circular
knife spindle may be replaced by a feed
spindle. A feed spindle is composed of
feed discs that help move product across
the slicing knife to the crosscut knives.
In a machine used for slicing only, both
circular and crosscut knife spindles and
related parts are removed. A feed spindle
may be used to aid product feed.
Crinkle cuts are produced by the slicing
knife and crosscut knives. French fry strips
are produced in this manner. A crinkle cut
cannot be produced by the circular knives.
 Section 6 6.3
Machine Setup

Slicing Case and Slice Gate 1

2
The inside surface of the slicing case
(1) is either flat or grooved. An adjustable
slice gate (2) at the top of the case
controls the product as it approaches the
slicing knife. The gate also has an inner
surface that is flat or grooved. At some
slice settings, a gate extension (3) is
fastened to the end of the gate. The gate
extension serves to maintain the product
in the correct position as it comes in 3
contact with the slicing knife.
The flat case and gate are used to
produce straight slices. The grooved case
and gate are used for crinkle slicing and
can be used for straight slicing for certain
products. For straight cuts on some
products, the grooved case with a flat gate
reduces product adhesion in the case. The
grooved case should not be used with
small elongated products to produce
straight slices along the axis, such as
producing carrot sticks from 2" long
4
product.
Optional L-shaped handles (4)
eliminate the need for tools when
removing the slice gate. Use in place of
the hex head screws where the hinge
plate fastens to the slicing case.

Impellers

Impellers are available with three, four

or seven paddles. Impeller selection is
based on the product shape and size.
Product must fit between the impeller
paddles (5). 5
6.4 Section 6
Machine Setup

Slicing Knife Holders and Insert 6

Knives 2

There are two types of slicing knife: the

replaceable insert knife (1) with a 5
slicing knife holder (2) or a one piece
knife. See the following page for
information on one piece knives. 1
The straight insert knife produces a flat
slice. A scalloped knife (3) also produces 3
a straight cut and is used with products
with thick skin, and fibrous or stringy .076" (1.9mm)

products. The crinkle insert knife (4) has

the crinkle depth shown at the right. 4
The slicing knife holder has slots (5)
that correspond to the spacing of the
circular knives or feed discs. The slots help
ensure complete penetration through the
product by the circular knives. The edge
opposite the knife serves as a shear edge
(6) for the crosscut knives.
Specialized slicing knives are available
for specific applications. Descriptions and
application information for specialized
knives are listed on the following pages.
Restrictions may apply; see the Parts
section for more information.
 Section 6 6.5
Machine Setup

One-Piece Slicing Knives

There are two types of slicing knife: a

one-piece knife or a replaceable insert
knife with a slicing knife holder. See the 1
previous page for information on the insert
knives and holders. The one-piece knife is
typically used for heavy duty applications.
The straight knife (1) produces a flat
slice. A scalloped knife (2) also produces
a straight cut and is used with products 2
with thick skin, and fibrous or stringy 4
products. Crinkle knives (3) have crinkle
depths as shown at the right. The one
piece knife is available with .076" crinkle 3
depth.
The slicing knives have slots (4) that
correspond to the spacing of the circular
knives or feed discs. The slots help ensure
complete penetration of the product by the .076" (1.9mm)
circular knives. The edge opposite the
knife serves as a shear edge for the
crosscut knives.
Specialized slicing knives are available
for specific applications. Descriptions and
application information for specialized
knives are listed on the following pages.
Restrictions may apply; see the Parts
section for more information.
6.6 Section 6
Machine Setup

Features of Slicing Knives and

Slicing Knife Holders 1

Specialized slicing knives are available

for specific applications. Restrictions may
apply; see the Parts section for more
information. Descriptions and application
information for specialized knives are 3
listed below. Note that a knife may include
2
several of the features listed; for example,
a knife may be heavy duty, thick, with
reduced clearance. Features are available
in the one-piece knife, knife holder or both
as indicated.
Heavy Duty (1): one-piece knife and
knife holder, thicker at the knife edge than 4
the standard knife.
Thick (2): standard knives and holders
are .312" (7.92 mm) thick; thick parts are
.372" (9.45 mm), allowing for greater
penetration of the circular knives into the
slots of the slicing knife. Use thick parts if
standard parts give incomplete cuts.
These knives will produce slices
6
.050-.060" (1.27-1.52 mm) thinner than 8
the slice setting indicates. 5
Scalloped (3): one-piece knife and 7
insert knife; the knife edge is scalloped for
use with products with thick skin, and
fibrous or stringy products.
Grooved (4): one-piece knife and knife
holder, the grooves help prevent product
adhesion. 9
Wide Slot (5): heavy duty applications
may cause the circular knives to flex
beyond the width of the standard slot,
causing metal-to-metal contact. Wider
slots help prevent knife contact; also for
use with .058" thick circular knives. No Slots (9): one-piece knife and knife
Reduced Clearance (6): these knives holder, for use when circular knives are not
and holders create a reduced clearance used, such as in slicing only applications or
between the lower edge of the slicing strip cutting with the crosscut knives.
knife, which acts as a shear edge (7), and
the crosscut knives (8). Clearance with
standard parts is .015-.020" (.38-.51 mm);
reduced clearance is .006-.010"
(.15-.25 mm). These parts are used for
products with tough skin or connective
tissue.
 Section 6 6.7
Machine Setup

Circular Support Assemblies 1

The circular support assembly (1)

holds the circular knife (2) or feed spindle
assembly. Several support assemblies are
available for different applications.
The standard assembly contains sealed
bearings and is suitable for most 3
applications. An assembly with grease
fittings for lubrication of the bearings is
2
available for use in applications that cause
bearing failure due to contaminants
penetrating the bearing seals. Also
available is an assembly with covers for
granulation applications that helps contain
product to the cutting zone.
The support assembly has slice guides
(3) that mount to the sides and help
contain product to the cutting zone.
Several types of slice guides are 5
available, and certain restrictions apply;
see the Parts section for details. 4

Fastening Posts

The fastening posts (4) act as

fasteners to secure the slicing knife to the
case and hold the circular support
assembly in place. The standard post has
flats near the base to accept a wrench. An
optional post has in addition a hexagonal
end (5) to accept a 6 mm wrench.
6.8 Section 6
Machine Setup

Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies 1

4
The circular knife spindle assembly is
composed of a shaft (1), circular knives 2
(2) separated by spacers (3), and a
clamping nut (4). The spacing of knives
determines the size of cut. Feed discs can
also be used between the circular knives, 3
usually for larger cuts to aid product
feeding (see the following page). One to
several discs are installed between a pair
of knives. 5
Circular knife shafts: different shafts
are required for .038" and .058" thick
knives. The shaft for .058" knives has flats
(5) on either side.
Circular knives: knives are available
with plain (6) or serrated (7) edges. The
serrated edge helps the flow of product
through the cutting unit. Knives are .038"
or .058" thick. The .058" thick knife has a
flat area (8) on the inside diameter to 6
prevent rotation on the shaft.
The .038" thick knives are standard (9) 7 8
or heavy duty (10). Heavy duty knives are
thicker near the knife edge for use on
meat and tough products, and can be
identified by the narrow bevel (11).
The knives shown at the right are 11
beveled on both sides, or double beveled
(12). A .038" thick heavy duty, serrated,
single bevel (13) knife is available for
cutting frozen products.
9 10 13

12
 Section 6 6.9
Machine Setup

Spacers: the diameter of standard

spacers (1) is 1.4" (35.6 mm). Large 2
diameter spacers (2) support the knife
closer to the edge to minimize flexing in
3
applications that cause the knives to
deflect from side-to-side. Using large
diameter spacers will limit the slice opening
and other restrictions may apply; see the
Parts section for details. Spacers for .058"
thick knives and feed discs have a groove (3)
for identification. 1
Optional filler spacers (4) can be used in
place of knives to change the size of cut.
Filler spacers are available in .038" and .058" 4
thicknesses and 1.40", 1.80" and 2.08"
diameters.

Feed Discs and Feed Spindle

Assemblies

A feed spindle (5) containing all feed

discs is typically used when strip cutting
and slicing. Feed discs (6) are .038" and
.058" thickness, in a range of diameters for
use at different slice thickness. The 5
diameter determines the penetration into
the product. In general, firm products
require less penetration. Also, if the
indentations caused by the discs are
undesirable, penetration should be 6
minimized. See the Section 10 Parts for
feed disc dimensions and a method for
calculating penetration. Also available is a
knife disc with an unsharpened edge to
produce a torn appearance. Your Urschel
representative can make recommendations
for specific applications.
6.10 Section 6
Machine Setup

Stripper Plates 1

The stripper plate removes product from

the areas between the circular knives. The
slots in the stripper plate correspond to the
spacing of the circular knives. There are
two types of stripper plates: the primary
stripper plate mounts to the slice gate and
the secondary stripper plate mounts to the
circular spindle support.
2
Primary Stripper Plates

The primary stripper plate (1) mounts

to the slice gate and is available in two
profiles: standard (2) and relieved. These
stripper plates can be adjusted up to the
standard circular spacers (1.4" diameter)
for a maximum slice opening of 5/8"
3
(16 mm).
The relieved stripper plate (3) has
slots, which are partially cut through to the
trailing edge (4), for use with products
containing skin and fiber.
4
Stripper plates with specialized features
are available for specific applications;
consult an Urschel representative for
5
recommendations. Descriptions and
application information are listed below.
Wide slot (5): standard slot width is .085",
wide slots are wider; use with .058" thick
circular knives and with .038" knives with
products that cause knife deflection.
Open end (6): slots are open to the end,
used for compressible products, leafy 6
products and products with skin that can
build up on the end of the standard stripper
plate.
Cut-off (7): used with the extended
secondary stripper plate (see the following
pages).This design allows the slice gate to
open further for larger cuts. Maximum slice
opening is 3/4" (19.1 mm) with 1.4" diameter
circular spacers. 7
 Section 6 6.11
Machine Setup

Stripper Plate Spacers and Shims

for Primary Stripper Plates

A stripper plate spacer (1) mounts 2

between the slice gate and stripper plate,
and positions the stripper plate parallel to
the slicing knife at different slice settings.
The spacer is imprinted with the slice size 1
range in which it is used. Note that this
size range applies when using standard
(1.4") diameter circular knife spacers.
Using large diameter circular spacers will
restrict the slice opening. A shim (2) may
also be used with the spacer when cutting 3
leafy or compressible products where
increased clearance between the slicing
knife and stripper plate improves product
feeding.

Secondary Stripper Plates and

Cut-off Stripper Plates

The secondary stripper plate (3)

mounts to the circular spindle support and 4 5
is used when slice thickness is greater
than 5/8" (16 mm). There are two profiles
for the secondary stripper plate: standard
(4) and extended (5). The standard profile
is used for most applications. The
extended secondary stripper plate has a
longer surface facing the slicing knife to
reduce tipping of the product and is
generally used for soft or compressible
products such as peaches. The extended
stripper plate is used with the cut-off
stripper plate (see the previous page).
Both the primary and secondary stripper
plates may be used together to help
prevent product build up between the
circular knives and in areas outside the
cutting zone.
6.12 Section 6
Machine Setup

Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies

To change the size of this cut, different

crosscut knife spindle assemblies must be
installed.
The crosscut spindle uses retaining rings
(1) to hold the knives in slots in the spindle.
The knives have an angled bend when seen
in profile, and have widths of narrow (2),
standard (3) or wide (4) depending on the
size of cuts. Narrow knives are available for 2
straight cuts. Standard-width knives are
available to produce straight and crinkle 1
cuts. Crinkles measure .076" deep and
.300" (7.6 mm) from peak to peak. Wide
knives produce straight cuts at larger sizes.
Spindles are available made from
Acetal, a food grade plastic. These
assemblies are lighter weight, and are
used for softer products and small cuts.
2 3 4
Shredding Spindles
.076" (1.9mm)
The shredding spindle (1) is installed
in place of the crosscut knife spindle
assembly. The spindle is composed of
shred discs (2) and spacers. The spindle 1 2
can be assembled with various
combinations of discs and spacers. The
number and arrangement of discs will
affect the shred; consult an Urschel
representative for additional information.
 7.1

Section 7
Service and Repair
Purpose and Contents of this
Section

The purpose of this section is to provide

instructions to maintenance personnel for
the disassembly, inspection, repair and
reassembly of the mechanical components
of the machine.
1
This section includes the following
topics:
2
Contents Page
Cutting Unit Overview and Maintenance Notes . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Lockout Procedure and Safety Precautions
Before Beginning Service and Repair, The Cutting Unit. . . 7.3
Removing the Circular Support Assembly, Inspecting the
Circular Support Assembly and Drive Coupling. . . . . . . . . 7.4
Installing the Circular Support Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
 WARNING
Removing the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly. . . . . . . . . . 7.6 This machine contains sharp knives,
Installing the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 rotating parts, and voltages dangerous
Removing the Primary Stripper Plate and Slicing Knife. . . . . . 7.8
Inspecting the Primary Stripper Plate and Slicing Knife . . . . . 7.9
to life. Only qualified trained personnel
Installing the Slicing Knife and Primary Stripper Plate . . . . . . 7.10 should perform maintenance duties on
Removing and Installing the Impeller, this machine. Follow all instructions in
Cleaning the Hinge Area of the Slice Gate, . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 this manual, or serious injury such as
Removing the Slice Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 amputation or death could result!
Installing the Slice Gate, Gate Extension and Slice Thickness . 7.14
Adjusting the Slice Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disassembling the Circular Support Assembly and Spindle . . .
7.15
7.16
Cutting Unit Overview and
Inspecting the Circular Support Assembly and Spindle, Maintenance Notes
Replacing the Bearings in the Circular Support Assembly . . 7.17
Reassembling the Circular Knife Spindle and Always disconnect and lock out the
Support Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18 power supply before beginning any
Disassembling the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly, maintenance procedure. For lockout
Inspecting the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . 7.20
Reassembling the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly . . . . . . 7.21
procedures, see the following page.
Disassembling the Shred Spindle Assembly, A protective sleeve (1) is supplied to
Inspecting the Shred Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22 cover the crosscut knife spindle
Reassembling the Shred Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23 assembly (2). Slide the protective sleeve
Knife Care Guidelines, Sharpening Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . 7.24 over the spindle before beginning any
Buffing the Knife Edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25 maintenance. The sleeve is intended to
Replacing the Timing Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26
Adjusting Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
help protect against incidental knife
Removing and Installing the Feed Cover and Slicing Case . . . 7.28 contact. Wear the protective gloves
Evaluating the Bearing Spindle Assemblies for Wear, supplied with the machine when removing
Removing and Installing the Bearing Spindle Assemblies . . 7.29 the spindle.

(continued on the following page)

7.2 Section 7
Service and Repair

Cutting Unit Overview and 1 2

Maintenance Notes (continued)

When practical, remove the crosscut

knife spindle assembly from the machine
before performing other maintenance.
Removing this assembly will eliminate the
chance of injury from knife contact. Install
the protective sleeve (1) and remove the
circular support assembly (2) before
removing the crosscut spindle.
 WARNING
Knife spindles are heavy and contain
sharp knives! Wear the protective
gloves supplied with the machine when
working with or near knife spindles.
Mishandling cutting parts can cause
personal injury!

Check for contact in the cutting parts.

After maintenance procedures are 3
complete, rotate the cutting components
backwards slowly, checking for metal-to-
metal contact. Use the large wrench (3)
or, if the crosscut knife spindle is not being
used, pull the timing belt (4). Any contact
must be corrected before the machine is
operated. 4
 WARNING
Rotating the impeller by hand may
cause serious injury such as
amputation! Grasping the outer
impeller plate and rotating the impeller Clean all parts, inspect for
places fingers dangerously close to the serviceability, and repair or replace if
slicing knife. Do not rotate the impeller necessary.
by hand! Use the method described Replace, close and securely latch or
above to rotate parts. fasten all guards when the maintenance
procedures are complete.
Keep parts organized during
disassembly. Some parts are very similar.
If parts are well organized, reassembly will
be easier.
 Section 7 7.3
Service and Repair

Lockout Procedure and Safety

Precautions Before Beginning
Service and Repair 5
 WARNING 1 4 2
Always follow the lockout procedure
before opening any guard or beginning 3
any repair procedure! Failure to lockout
the disconnect switch could result in
accidental start-up and severe injury!

1. If the machine is running, push the

stop button (1).

2. Turn the disconnect switch handle

(2) off and lock out. Use the padlock
(3) attached to the enclosure to lock
the switch, or lock the switch according
to your plant policy on energy lockout
procedures.

3. Verify that the machine will not start.

If the emergency stop button (4) was
pushed, rotate and pull out to reset. 6 5
After rotating parts have stopped, press 7
the start button (5) and hold for two 2
seconds. The machine should not start.

The Cutting Unit

Refer to the figure at the right. The 4

following are the major components of the
dicing unit:
(1) Slice Case
(2) Slice Gate
(3) Impeller
(4) Slicing Knife
1
(5) Circular Knife Support and Spindle
(6) Stripper Plate 3
(7) Crosscut Knife Spindle
7.4 Section 7
Service and Repair

Removing the Circular Support

Assembly

1. Rotate the cutting components by 1

hand using the drive belt or large
wrench. Align the marks (1) on the end
of the circular knife shaft and the
circular support side. Aligning these
marks positions the open side of the
drive coupling (2) so that the circular 3
support can be removed.

2. Remove the circular support 2

assembly. Remove the two locking
nuts (3) and pull the circular support
assembly straight out and off of the
fastening posts (4). The support
assembly contains the circular knife
spindle assembly; place the assembly
in a safe place.
 CAUTION
Always carry and store the circular
support assembly and circular spindle
so that exposed knife edges do not
present a safety hazard.

Inspecting the Circular Support

Assembly and Drive Coupling

Check for nicks or burrs on all mating 4

surfaces and hone if necessary.
Circular knife shaft: inspect the
square end (5) of the shaft for wear. 5
Replace the shaft if the end is worn.
Drive coupling: inspect the coupling for 6
wear. Replace the coupling if the square
opening (6) is worn. Periodically inspect
the drive coupling fasteners (7). The 7
fasteners must be fully tightened.
Fastening posts: check the posts (8)
for straightness; replace if the posts are 8
bent.
 Section 7 7.5
Service and Repair

Installing the Circular Support 1

Assembly 2

1. Replace the drive coupling (1) if

necessary. Vibration resistant lock
washers (2) are installed with the
fasteners (3). Install these washers 3
with the mating sides together as
2
shown to achieve the locking effect.
Tighten the fasteners securely.

2. Install the circular support 4

1
assembly. Rotate the mechanical
components until the open side of the
drive coupling faces out and the marks
(4) on the shaft and housing are
aligned. Align the marks (5) on the
circular spindle shaft and the circular
support side. Guide the circular support 3
assembly onto the fastening posts. The
assembly must be fully seated.
Replace the two locking nuts and
tighten securely.
IMPORTANT!:
The circular spindle support assembly and
slicing knife holder must be fully seated!
Inspect the mounting surfaces and remove
any foreign material or nicks that may
prevent parts from seating. Parts can be
damaged if not installed properly.
5
7.6 Section 7
Service and Repair

Removing the Crosscut Knife 3

Spindle Assembly
 CAUTION
The crosscut spindle is heavy! The
stainless steel spindle weighs 4
approximately 60 pounds (27 kg). The
acetal spindle is lighter. Use
appropriate lifting techniques.

1. Place the protective sleeve (1) over 1

the crosscut knife spindle assembly.
Remove the circular support assembly
as described on the previous pages.

2. Rotate the spindle with the large

combination wrench (2) until the 4
crosscut wrench (3) can be inserted
over the flat areas of the crosscut shaft
(see the top figure on the following
page). The square cutout on the
wrench fits over the latch strike (4).

3. Use the large wrench and turn the

cup (5) counterclockwise to loosen.
Remove the cup. Slide the crosscut
spindle assembly off the spindle 5
extension (6). Place the spindle on 2
end or block so that it will not roll.

If the machine is being used for slicing

or strip cutting with the circular knives, the
spindle extension can be removed. Four
fasteners hold the extension to the
crosscut shaft (see the top figure on the
following page).

6
 Section 7 7.7
Service and Repair

Installing the Crosscut Knife

Spindle Assembly

1. Place the protective sleeve over the

spindle. 1

2. Slide the crosscut spindle onto the

spindle extension (1). The spindle 6
has a rotation and knife direction 3
symbol (2) on the inside flange. This
symbol must face out. Rotate the
spindle until the square opening in the
inner flange slides over the flats on
the extension (3). 4

3. Install the cup (4) and turn clockwise

by hand until it contacts the crosscut
spindle.

4. Install the crosscut wrench (5).

Rotate the cup with the large wrench
until the crosscut wrench fits over the 2
flats on the crosscut shaft (6). The
square cutout on the crosscut wrench
must also fit over the latch strike (7). 5

5. Tighten the cup. Use the large

combination wrench (8) to tighten. 7
Remove the crosscut wrench.
NOTICE
Do not use a crinkle crosscut knife spindle
with a straight slicing knife or slicing knife
holder. Using these parts together will cause 4
the knives to strike the shear edge.

8
7.8 Section 7
Service and Repair

Removing the Primary Stripper

Plate and Slicing Knife
1
1. Remove the slicing knife insert (1).
Use the handle (2) supplied with the
machine. The tab on the knife insert 2
goes into the slot in the handle; insert
the locking pin. Carefully pull the knife
from the slicing knife holder.
Note that some cutting applications
may use a one-piece slicing knife (no
replaceable insert). This knife is
removed in the same manner as the
slicing knife holder, described in Step 4
below.

2. Remove the stripper plate (3). Three

screws hold the stripper plate to the
stripper plate spacer on the slice gate.

3. Remove the stripper plate spacer

(4). For some applications a shim may
3
be used between the stripper plate and
spacer; remove the shim. Three screws
hold the spacer to the slice gate. If the
spacer does not slide off easily, use the
1/4-20 screws supplied with the tools
as jacking screws (5). Place the
screws in the threaded holes in the
spacer and alternately turn each screw
a small amount until the spacer is
loosened.
4
4. Check that the gate extension strip
(6) is the correct size for the slice
thickness setting. The part is fastened
with two socket head cap screws. If the
strip does not slide off easily, use the
1/4-20 screws supplied with the tools
as jacking screws. See the Parts 5
section to select gate extension strips.

6
 Section 7 7.9
Service and Repair

5. Remove the slicing knife holder (1)

or one-piece slicing knife. The
crosscut knife spindle must be
removed first (see the previous pages).
The fastening posts (2) act as
fasteners to secure the knife holder to
the case. Use the long 5/16" wrench
(3) supplied with the machine on the
2
flats to remove the posts.

Inspecting the Primary Stripper 1

3
Plate and Slicing Knife

Check for nicks or burrs on all mating

surfaces and hone if necessary. File or
hone any nicks along the knife slot (4) in
the slicing knife holder. The slot must hold
the slicing knife securely with no gaps
along the mating edges. The edge
opposite the cutting edge is the shear
edge (5) for the crosscut knives. File or
5
hone any nicks along the shear edge. If 4
the shear edge is rounded from wear,
replace the knife.
Check the pins (6) in the slicing case.
The pins can be replaced if they are
damaged. When installing new pins, use a
thread locking compound suitable for
disassembly, such as blue Loctite®.

6
7.10 Section 7
Service and Repair

Installing the Slicing Knife and

Primary Stripper Plate

For information on the secondary

stripper plate, which mounts to the circular
support, see Reassembling the Circular
Knife Spindle and Support Assemblies.
1
1. The gate extension (1) mounts to the
end of the slice gate. If slice thickness
is changed, a different gate extension
may be required. See the Parts section
for part numbers.

2. Install the slicing knife or slicing

knife holder. Two fastening posts (2)
hold the slicing knife to the case. Use
the wrench supplied with the machine;
an optional torque wrench is available,
see Tools in the Parts section.
2
3. Install the stripper plate spacer (3).
Select a spacer based on slice
thickness. Fasten the spacer to the
slice gate with the three low head
socket head cap screws. For some
applications, a shim (4) may be used
between the stripper plate and spacer.
The maximum size in the slice
range (5) marked on the spacer
applies when using 1.4" diameter
circular knife spacers; maximum slice
opening will be less when using large
diameter circular spacers.

5 3
4
 Section 7 7.11
Service and Repair

4. Install the stripper plate (1). Fasten

the stripper plate to the spacer with the
socket head cap screws, but do not
fully tighten at this time.

5. Adjust the stripper plate. The pin

holes (2) in the stripper plate are
elongated to allow a slight side-to-side
adjustment. Install the circular support,
then use a screwdriver or similar tool to 1
move the stripper plate side-to-side to
center the slots on the circular knives
(3). Tighten the fasteners for the
stripper plate. Rotate the cutting parts
backwards to check for knife contact.

6. Install the replaceable slicing knife

insert if a knife holder is being used.
Apply a small amount of grease to the
slicing knife. Guide the knife into the
slot in the slicing knife holder. Use the
handle (4) supplied with the machine
and push the knife in until fully seated.
The knife must be down to the bottom
of the slot.
2

4
7.12 Section 7
Service and Repair

Removing and Installing the

Impeller
1
 CAUTION
The impeller is heavy! The impeller
weighs approximately 34 pounds
(15.5 kg); impellers with additional
paddles weigh more. Use appropriate
lifting techniques.

1. Unfasten the three screws (1) that

hold the impeller (2) in place. Carefully
slide the impeller out of the case.
2
2. Inspect the impeller. Check for worn
or chipped paddles and for nicks or
burrs on the mounting surface. Hone
off any burrs. 5
3. Install the impeller. Lightly grease the
impeller hub and fasteners. Carefully
slide the impeller into the case and 4
fasten with the three screws.

Cleaning the Hinge Area of the Slice

Gate
3
The hinge area of the slice gate can be
cleaned without disassembling the slice
adjustment parts. To clean, first turn the
slice adjustment knob to close the gate
down to the zero setting. Next, remove the
three hex head screws or L-handle
screws (3) and washers that hold the
hinge plate (4) to the slice case. Loosen
the socket head screw (5) in the chip
guard. From inside the case, rotate the
6
gate out as shown to clean the hinge area
(6). To reassemble, install the fasteners in
the hinge plate and push the slice gate
against the case in the hinge area while
tightening the fasteners.
 Section 7 7.13
Service and Repair

Removing the Slice Gate

1. Remove the slicing knife and slicing

knife holder. (Note that the optional 2
water spray system is shown in the
pictures at the right.)
1
2. Loosen the set screw in the
adjustment shaft (1). Turn the slice
adjustment knob (2) counterclockwise
until the stud comes out of the
adjustment shaft.

3. Slide the chip guard bar (3) out and

remove the socket head screw from the
slot (4) in the chip guard.

4. Support the slice gate (5) while

removing the three hex head screws
(6) and washers that fasten the hinge 3
plate to the case. The hinge plate may
be fastened with optional L-handle
screws (see the previous page). If the 4
impeller is in place, rotate the impeller
so that a paddle is below the gate. The
paddle helps support the gate and
prevents it from dropping down.

5. Carefully lift the slice gate from the

case.

5
7.14 Section 7
Service and Repair

Installing the Slice Gate

1. Install the following parts if they

have been removed: chip guards (1),
slice gate bar (2), adjustment shaft
and locking knob (3) and slice gate
guard (4). If a different slice gate will
be installed, move the slice gate guard
to the replacement slice gate.
1
2. Install the slice gate. Replace the hex
nuts (5) or L-handle screws in the
hinge plate. Hold the slice gate at the 0
or 1/8" position. Push the gate into the
3 2 4
case so that the parts are tightly
together at the hinge point and tighten
the fasteners.

3. Install the chip guard bar (6).

4. Install the adjustment knob (7). Turn

the threaded portion of the knob into
the adjustment shaft. Tighten the knob,
then loosen about 1/4 turn and tighten 9
the set screw (8). Check that the knob
turns and moves the gate through the
full range of adjustment.

Gate Extension and Slice Thickness

The gate extension (9) fastens to the 5

end of the slice gate. Specific gate
extensions are used for different slice
thicknesses. If slice thickness is changed,
a different gate extension may be
required. See Section 10 Parts: Gate
Extensions.

7 6

8
 Section 7 7.15
Service and Repair

Adjusting the Slice Thickness 1

Slice thickness is controlled by the slice

gate adjustment knob (1). Turning the
knob causes the slice gate (2) to move
closer or farther from the slicing knife.
To adjust slice thickness:

1. Loosen the socket head cap screw 2

(3) in the chip guard and loosen the 3
locking knob (4).
4
2. Turn the adjustment knob until the
slice gate moves to the mark on the
chip guard (5) for the desired setting.

3. Tighten the locking knob and socket

head cap screw.
5
Note that changing slice thickness may
also require changing the stripper plate
spacer and gate extension.
Each etched line on the chip guard
represents a 1/8" increment in slice
thickness (3 mm on the metric chip guard).
The 1/4" increments are marked with
numbers (6 mm on the metric chip guard).
Use the marks as a reference. Cut and
measure product to verify that the desired
slice is being produced.
IMPORTANT
Restrictions for the slice setting:
Do not exceed 7/8" (22.2 mm) slice setting
when using a crinkle slicing knife. For
slice only, slice setting can be set up to 1"
(25.4 mm).
The slice opening is restricted when using
large diameter circular spacers. The
slice adjustment can be increased to the
point where the stripper plate comes in
contact with the circular knife spacers, and
then decreased slightly. Do not open the
slice gate beyond the point where
resistance is felt or damage to parts may
occur.
7.16 Section 7
Service and Repair

Disassembling the Circular

Support Assembly and Spindle
 WARNING
Cutting parts are sharp and can cause
injury! Wear protective gloves when
handling cutting parts.
1
1. Check the bearings for wear. Rotate
the circular knife spindle shaft by hand 2 3
and feel for any rough or tight spots that
may indicate bearing wear. Check the
shaft for side-to-side and in-and-out
movement. Total end play should not
exceed .010" (.254 mm). To replace the
bearings, see the following pages.

2. Remove the circular knife spindle

assembly from the support. Set the
support upright with the square end of
the shaft facing up. Remove the two
fasteners that hold the side (1) to the
top (2). Lift up on the side and gently tap 5
the end of the circular spindle (3) with a 7
lead or plastic hammer to loosen the
side from the top. Remove the circular
8
knife spindle.

3. Clamp the end of the spindle in a vice

with soft metal jaws (4). Soft jaws
protect the precision parts.
6
4. Remove the spindle nut (5). Use the
wrench (6) supplied with the machine
and turn the nut clockwise (the nut is a
left hand thread). Remove the knives
(7) and spacers (8). 4
 Section 7 7.17
Service and Repair

Inspecting the Circular Support

Assembly and Spindle
1
Spacers, Spindle and Spindle Nut:
Check for burrs and hone if necessary but
be careful to remove only the burr. Check
the O-rings (1) at the ends of the spindle
and replace if damaged.
Knives, feed discs and spacers:
Replace any knives or feed discs that are
bent or have large nicks. Use a hone to
remove nicks and burrs from spacers. For 2
detailed information on knife care and
sharpening, see Knife Care in this section.
Spindle support: Check for damage or
scoring in the bearing areas. Check all
mating surfaces for nicks or burrs; use a
hone to remove any burrs that may prevent
parts from seating properly. 3

Replacing the Bearings in the

Circular Support Assembly
1. Remove the bearings. Support a side
(2) so that the worn bearing can drop
out. Use a punch and tap evenly around 4
the inner race (3) until the bearing drops
out. Repeat with the remaining side.
5
NOTICE
Use Urschel replacement bearings! The
inner races have a tapered bore to mate 8
with the tapered ends of the circular knife
spindle.
6 8
2. Install new bearings. Apply a thin layer
of grease on the bearing seating areas.
Slide the bearing (4) on the shaft (5) to
check the orientation. The wide end (6)
of the tapered bore of the bearing must 7
face out of the side (7) so that the shaft
will properly seat in the bearing. Install
the bearing into the side with the
bearing seating tool (8) and an arbor
press.
7.18 Section 7
Service and Repair

Reassembling the Circular Knife

Spindle and Support Assembly
NOTICE 2
Do not use .038" thick knives and related 2
parts together with .058" thick knives and
related parts.
1
1. Install knives and spacers on the
circular knife shaft. The spindle begins 1
and ends with a knife. Install the knives
so that the sides with common features
face the same direction. For example,
install the serrated sides or the sides with
the part number mark facing the same
direction. Some spindles use a final 3
spacer installed before the last knife. See
circular knife and feed spindle
assemblies in Section 10 Parts.
.058" thick knives: install knives so
that the straight area (1) on the inside
diameter alternates from side-to-side
on the shaft. The shaft has flat areas
(2) on opposite sides. Install the knives
so that the sides with the part number
all face the same direction on the shaft
(either up or down). Note that spacers
6
for .058" thick knives have a groove
(3) on the outside diameter. 4

NOTICE
Straight areas on the inside diameter of
.058" knives must be alternated side- 5
to-side or the final knife or spacer may
not fit correctly.

2. Lubricate the spindle threads and

install the nut (4). Make sure the last
knife is not in the threaded portion of the
spindle. Turn the nut counter-clockwise
(the nut is a left-hand thread) using the
wrench (5) supplied with the machine.
The O-rings (6) must be in place at the
ends of the spindle.
 Section 7 7.19
Service and Repair

3. Place the spindle assembly in the

circular support. Attach the side with
the alignment mark (1) to the base if it
was removed. Install the spindle with 3
the square end (2) of the shaft facing
up and replace the remaining side (3).
Tap (4) the outer edge of the side as it
seats on the top so that the bearing 2
also seats on the shaft.
1
4. Install the secondary stripper plate
(5), if required. Mount the stripper plate
4
to the circular support and fasten with
the three hex head cap screws. If the
circular knives are not centered in the
slots in the stripper plate, check that
parts are correctly assembled. Note
that large diameter circular knife
spacers cannot be used with the 5
secondary stripper plate.

Alternate Spindle Setups:

Feed discs (6) may be used between the
circular knives, or a feed spindle (7) can be
made up of feed discs and spacers.
Large diameter spacers (8): spindles
can be assembled with large spacers; the 7
following restrictions apply.
Slice opening restriction: do not exceed 8
recommended settings or damage to parts
may occur (see the Parts section).
Stripper plate restrictions: do not use a
stripper plate shim; do not use a secondary
stripper plate.
Feed disc restrictions: the points on feed 6
discs with smaller diameters are not long
enough to protrude beyond the stripper
plate.
Filler spacers (9): these spacers are the 9
thickness of the knives and the diameter of
the spacers; substitute for knives or feed
discs to change the size of cut. Filler
spacers are available in .038" and .058"
thicknesses and 1.40", 1.80" and 2.08"
diameters.
7.20 Section 7
Service and Repair

Disassembling the Crosscut Knife 2

Spindle Assembly
 WARNING
Cutting parts are sharp and can cause 1
injury! Wear protective gloves when
handling cutting parts.

1. Place the spindle upright on a level

work surface with the rotation and
knife direction symbol (1) on the
inside flange facing up. The retaining
ring (2) that faces outward on the
machine is up.

2. Remove the retaining ring. Generally,

only the ring that faces up needs to be
removed. If the attached ring has product
build-up, remove it also and clean 3
thoroughly.

3. Remove the knives. Carefully pull the

knives (3) from the slots.

Inspecting the Crosscut Knife

Spindle Assembly
Crosscut spindle: Inspect knife slots
for burrs or foreign material; clean slots
thoroughly and hone burrs if necessary.
Check for burrs on all mating surfaces.
Hone if necessary, but be careful to
remove only the burr.
Retaining rings: Inspect for burrs and
swelling; hone if necessary. Check the area
of the ring that is in contact with the knives.
The ends of the knives may have worn
notches in this area. Notches in the ring
may prevent the knives from clamping
properly. Rotate the ring in such a way that
the fastener holes are aligned and areas
without worn notches are in contact with the
knives.
Knives: Replace any knives that have
large nicks or are bent beyond
straightening. See Knife Care Guidelines
later in this section.
 Section 7 7.21
Service and Repair

Reassembling the Crosscut Knife

Spindle Assembly
1
1. Check the retaining ring (1) that faces
inward on the machine; tighten the
screws if necessary. If this retaining ring
has been removed, grease the fasteners
before installing.

2. Install the knives. Knife slots (2) must

be clean so that the knives will seat
properly. Stand the spindle upright on the
attached retaining ring (the rotation
symbol will be visible on the inner 2
flange). Carefully insert the knives (3)
into the slots with the sharpened edges
pointing counterclockwise when looking
down on the spindle.
NOTICE
The knives must be fully seated in the
slots or poor quality cuts and damage to 3
cutting parts could result.

3. Install the retaining ring (4). Grease

the fasteners. Gradually and alternately
tighten the fasteners using one of the 4
two torque wrenches provided.
Use the 65 inch-pound torque
wrench (5) (7.2 newton-meter) for
spindle sizes 3/32–1/4" (2.4–6.4 mm).
Use the 40 inch-pound torque
wrench (6) (4.4 newton-meter) for
spindles 9/32" (7.1 mm) and larger.

6
7.22 Section 7
Service and Repair

Disassembling the Shred Spindle 2

Assembly

1. Place the spindle upright on a level

work surface so that the rotation and 1
knife direction symbol (1) on the
inside flange is visible.

2. Remove the retaining ring (2).

Generally, only the ring that faces up
needs to be removed. If the bottom ring
has product build-up, remove it also after
removing the discs. 4

3. Remove the shred discs (3) and

spacers. The discs slide off of the 3
spindle. Remove the alignment rod (4).

Inspecting the Shred Spindle

Assembly

Crosscut spindle: Check for burrs on

all mating surfaces. Hone if necessary, but
be careful to remove only the burr.
Retaining rings: Inspect for burrs and
swelling; hone if necessary.
Discs: Replace any discs that have
large nicks or are bent beyond
straightening. See Knife Care Guidelines
later in this section.
 Section 7 7.23
Service and Repair

Reassembling the Shred Spindle

Assembly

1. Check the retaining ring (1) attached to 2

the spindle (the end of the spindle
installed inward on the machine); tighten
the screws if necessary. If this retaining
ring has been removed, grease the
fasteners before installing.

2. Place the spindle upright on a level

work surface so that the rotation and
knife direction symbol (2) on the 5
inside flange is visible.

3. Install the shred discs. Slide the discs

(2) and spacers (3) onto the spindle,
aligning the notches (4) on the inside 1 2 3 4
diameter with the alignment rod (5).

4. Install the retaining ring (6). Grease

the fasteners. Gradually and alternately
tighten the fasteners using the
65 inch-pound torque wrench (7)
(7.2 newton-meter). 7 6
7.24 Section 7
Service and Repair

Knife Care Guidelines Type of Knife Knife

Part Number
Minimum Size (A)
inch mm
Crosscut, 80109 (narrow) 0.223 5.7
1. Do not attempt to remove all defects standard
from the knife edge by sharpening. 80110 (medium) 0.595 15.1
This practice results in shortened knife A
life. Small defects will not affect knife
80111 (wide) 1.125 28.6
performance.

2. Do not install new knives and worn Circular 42265, 42555, bottom of serrations
42759
knives together on the same spindle. A
Poor quality cuts may result. Keep all 42490, 42661 3.480 88.4
the knives from one spindle in a set
and sharpen them together.
Slicing, 80445 1.249 31.7
Periodically check knife width or straight, insert
diameter to make sure all the knives in
a set are the same size. A

3. Recommended minimum Slicing, One-piece knives, 3.750 95.3

dimensions: see the chart at the right. straight (does not include
reduced-clearance
These are general guidelines only. knives)
Customers may get satisfactory results
from knives ground smaller, but a A
deterioration in quality of cut is
possible. Measure standard crosscut
knives as shown in the chart, and
heavy duty crosscut knives and slicing
knives from front to back. Measure the
2
diameter of circular knives unless
otherwise noted.

Sharpening Equipment 1

Urschel manufactures machines to

quickly and efficiently sharpen knives. The
Model WG honing machine (1) is used to
sharpen slicing knives and crosscut knives
(straight cut only). Model CKG honing
machine (2) is used to place the best
possible edge on circular knives. Contact
your Urschel representative for additional
information on these machines.
 Section 7 7.25
Service and Repair

Buffing the Knife Edge 1

 WARNING
Only qualified trained personnel should
buff knives. Use adequate eye and
respiratory protection, and a properly
guarded buffing wheel. Hold the knife
securely. Never attempt to catch a
dropped knife! Should you drop a knife
during the buffing operation, move
away and let it fall.

When crosscut knives are sharpened by the knife over and buff with the bevel side
grinding, filing or honing, a slight wire edge down. Continue buffing, switching from
may be produced. Buffing will remove this side to side, until wire edge or burr is
wire edge. gone.
Install two to four 10" (254 mm)
diameter buffing wheels side by side Failure to obtain sharp edges by buffing
between flanges at least 2" (51 mm) in may be caused by the following:
diameter. Buffing wheels and bars of
buffing compound are available from 1. The knife edge may be too dull or
Urschel Laboratories, see Section 10 blunt. A blunt edge must always be
Parts: Tools. Turn on the buffer (3600 ground or filed to restore a bevel width
RPM) and hold the bar of buffing compound and angle similar to that found on a
firmly against the outside diameter of the new knife.
buffing wheels to apply a light coating of
compound. Apply compound frequently to 2. The knife must be correctly held
obtain sharp edges quickly. against the buffing wheel.
NOTICE 3. Too little or too much buffing compound
If excess compound is applied, the wheel on the wheel.
will harden, making it ineffective. To soften
the wheel, use a buffing wheel rake, 4. Undersize buffing wheels. Discard
available from an industrial supplier. the buffing wheels when they are
worn to 8-3/4" (222 mm) diameter.
When holding a knife, be cautious and
use a firm grip. Hold the knife firmly with
the bevel side up, parallel with and just
below the center line of the shaft of the
buffer. Push the knife edge into the buffing
wheel, penetrating the wheel 1/16"–1/8"
(1.5–3 mm). Move the knife endwise and
buff the entire edge across the buffing
wheel with a steady rapid movement in
each direction. Several rapid passes are
better than one or two slow ones. Do not
hold the knife in one area of the buffing
wheel too long as the edge may heat and
burn. If a burr or wire edge remains, turn
7.26 Section 7
Service and Repair

Replacing the Timing Belt

1. Loosen the motor fasteners on the

inside of the motor mounting plate
(1). Slide the motor to relieve tension
on the timing belt (2).

2. Remove the worn belt and install a 1

new belt.

3. Use the motor tension wrench (3) to

slide the motor and apply tension to the
timing belt. The pin (4) on the wrench 2
fits in a hole on the motor mounting
plate.

6. Tighten the motor fasteners. Check

belt tension and adjust if necessary.

4
 Section 7 7.27
Service and Repair

Adjusting Belt Tension

1. Use the belt tension tester (5) to 5

6 7
check belt tension. Push the O-ring (6)
on the force deflection scale (7) to
the bottom of the scale.

2. Place the tester on the belt by the

belt tension label (8). Push on the
plunger until the belt deflects .4"
(10 mm). The lines on the label are .1"
(2.5 mm) apart. Note the location of the
O-ring on the force deflection scale. 8
When properly tensioned, the gauge
reads 8-9 pounds (3.5-4 kg).

3. Readjust belt tension if necessary.

Loosen the motor fasteners. Apply
tension to the belts and retighten the
fasteners. Recheck with the belt
tension tester.
NOTICE
Excessive belt tension may cause the
motor to fail prematurely.
7.28 Section 7
Service and Repair

Removing and Installing the Feed

Cover and Slicing Case
 WARNING
The feed cover and slicing case are
heavy! Use caution and appropriate
lifting equipment when handling or 2
personal injury such as crushing could
result. 1

1. Remove the feed cover (1). Use a

lifting strap attached to a suitable lifting
device. Support the feed cover so that 3
it does not tip or swing when free of the
hinge pins. The hopper extension (2)
and discharge chute extension (3)
can be removed prior to removing the
feed cover to lessen the weight and
make handling easier. These
extensions must be reattached after
5
maintenance is complete to ensure 4
safe operation. The discharge
extension is attached with tamper-
resistant fasteners. Tools for the
fasteners are supplied with the
machine and must be used by
authorized personnel only.

2. Secure the case (4) with a lifting

strap that passes through the slot (5)
in the top of the case. The fasteners
that hold the case to the support
housing are accessed from within the
support housing. Two pins locate the
case on the housing. The case weighs
approximately 73 lbs (33.2 kg).

When installing the case, place the

mounting strap in the slot at the top of the
case so as not to interfere when the case is
fastened to the support housing.
 Section 7 7.29
Service and Repair

Evaluating the Bearing Spindle

Assemblies for Wear

First, remove the cutting spindles and 1 3

the impeller as described previously in this
2
section. Next, loosen the motor fasteners
and slide the motor to loosen the drive
belt. Remove the timing belt.
Check the shaft of each bearing spindle
assembly for in-and-out (1) and up-and-
down (2) movement. Any movement
indicates bearing wear. Rotate (3) each
shaft. If tight or rough spots are detected,
the bearings are worn and in need of
replacement.
The following steps give a procedure for
removing all of the spindle assemblies.
However, the spindles can also be removed 3. Remove the bearing spindles. Remove
individually. the pulleys and grease fittings from each
spindle. The fasteners are removed from
Removing and Installing the inside the support housing. The impeller
Bearing Spindle Assemblies and crosscut spindles are removed from
the outside of the support housing. The
 WARNING circular spindle is removed from the
The spindles are heavy! Use caution interior of the support housing.
and appropriate lifting equipment when
removing and installing these parts or 4. To install the spindles, reverse the
personal injury such as crushing could procedure for spindle removal. Grease
result. fitting holes must be properly oriented.
The circular spindle assembly has an
Approximate weights of the bearing “O” ring in the mounting area; grease the
spindle assemblies: “O” ring before installation.
Impeller assembly: 41 lbs (18.6 kg);
Crosscut assembly: 32 lbs (14.5 kg); Contact an Urschel representative for
Circular assembly: 16 lbs (7.3 kg). information on repairing the bearing
spindles.
1. Remove all cutting parts as
described on the previous pages.

2. Remove gears, pulleys and grease

fittings from each spindle assembly.
7.30 Section 7
Service and Repair

This page intentionally left blank.

 8.1

Section 8
Electrical System
Contents Page
Purpose and Contents of this Two Disconnect Switches,
Section Routine Maintenance of the Electrical System . . . . . . . . 8.2
Electrical Enclosure Interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
The purpose of this section is to provide Safety Relay, Guard Locking Switch and
instructions to qualified personnel for the Standstill Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
Mini Circuit Breakers (MCB) and Fuses,
maintenance of the electrical system, Soft Start Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
followed by a description of the function of Function of the Guard Locking Switch Circuit,
the major components and the circuit. For Operation of the Guard Locking Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
a step-by-step analysis of electrical Guard Locking Switch Status LEDs,
problems see Section 9 Troubleshooting. Replacing the Guard Locking Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7
This section includes the following Function of the Standstill Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
Standstill Monitor Status LEDs, Safety Relay LEDs . . . . . . 8.9
topics: Function of the Variable Frequency Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10
Function of the Electrical System, Machine with a VFD. . . . 8.12
Function of the Electrical System, Machine with
a Soft Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.14
8.2 Section 8
Electrical System

Two Disconnect Switches

 WARNING
Servicing the electrical enclosure with
incoming power on may cause
electrocution! The enclosure contains
dangerous voltages even though the
disconnect switch handle is off.
Remove incoming power before
servicing.

This machine has two disconnect 1

switches to enable the circuitry for the
guard locking switch to function when the
disconnect switch handle on the electrical 3
enclosure is in the off position.
Before performing electrical service,
4
turn the handle (1) on the electrical
enclosure door to the off position. The
handle operates the disconnect switch
labeled DISC2 (2). This switch is used to
remove power to the motor during
machine maintenance. 2
The disconnect switch labeled DISC1
(3) has an ON/OFF knob (4). This switch
removes all power in the electrical
enclosure except where incoming power is
connected to the top of the switch.
NOTICE
Routine Maintenance of the Electrical components that fail due to
Electrical System water or chemical contamination are not
covered under the warranty.
Inspect the interior of the electrical
enclosure frequently for the accumulation of Inspect the push button assemblies and
water. If a significant amount of water pilot light assembly for damage or corrosion.
accumulates in the bottom of the enclosure, Replace the rubber boots and pilot light lens
check the breather drain. The breather if they are damaged.
drain must be free from obstruction. Excess
water could also indicate an opening or
loose fitting that allows water to enter the
enclosure. Check the gasket around the
door and all access points to the enclosure.
 Section 8 8.3
Electrical System

Electrical Enclosure Interior 4 5 3 1

The top figure shows an electrical
enclosure with a variable frequency drive
(VFD). The bottom figure shows a soft start
enclosure.
(1) Disconnect Switch (DISC1), main 2
power, including 24 volt control
(2) Disconnect Switch (DISC2), power to
the motor
(3) Short Circuit Protective Device, Main
(Circuit Breaker MCB1 or Fuses FU1)
(4) Transformer 8
(5) Short Circuit Protective Device for 9 6 7
transformer (Circuit Breakers MCB2 and
MCB3 or Fuses FU2 and FU3)
(6) Standstill Monitor
(7) Safety Relay
(8) Control Relays
(9) Variable Frequency Drive
(10) Contactor (1M)
(11) Soft Start Controller
Power Line Filter and Ferrite, not shown,
mount behind and next to VFD respectively
in CE compliant enclosures 1

2
5
4 3

11 8

10 6 7
8.4 Section 8
Electrical System

Safety Relay

The safety relay (1) contains a logic input 4

circuit card and controls a relay output. The 1
guard locking switch contacts, the contacts
for the emergency stop button and the belt
guard sensor are connected to terminal
blocks which connect these devices in
series to the safety relay. When these
devices are actuated, the logic circuit will
close the relay contacts. If any of the
devices are not activated, the logic circuit
will open the relay contacts. Based on the
switch signal, the safety relay will either
allow or not allow the machine to start.

Guard Locking Switch and

Standstill Monitor

The guard locking switch (2) is an 2

electrical device that locks protective guards
in place when the machine is running.
These guards enclose potentially dangerous
machine areas. The switch is unlocked
electrically, requiring incoming power to the
machine. The switch is composed of two
components: the guard locking switch and
the flexible actuator (3).
The switch works in conjunction with a 3
standstill monitor (4) located in the
electrical enclosure. The standstill monitor
detects motor rotation. When the motor
stops rotating, the standstill monitor sends
a signal to the switch. A red status light on
the switch will illuminate and a solenoid in
the switch will release the flexible
actuator, allowing guards to open.
 Section 8 8.5
Electrical System

Mini Circuit Breakers (MCB) and

Fuses
1
The electrical enclosure is supplied with
fuses or mini circuit breakers (1). The
chart below shows the short circuit
protective devices for a given voltage and
power supply type. (A Wye power supply is
the most common type worldwide). If fuses
fail or MCBs trip frequently, investigate the
cause.
Voltage Power Short Circuit Protective
Supply Device (SCPD)
Type Circuit Fuse 2
Breaker
240 and Wye P
3
lower Delta P P
380-480 Wye P P
Delta P
575 Wye P
Delta P

Soft Start Controller

A machine with one motor speed is

supplied with a soft start controller (2)
which controls inrush current and voltage to
the motor. A soft start helps prolong the life
of the belts and drive train.
To replace the soft start controller, first
4
remove the overload reset solenoid (3).
Set the dip switches (4) in the new soft
start controller. Switch settings are shown 5
on the electrical schematics located inside
the electrical enclosure door and in the
Parts manual. Set the overload relay by
turning the dial (5) to the motor Full Load
Amperage (FLA) specified on the motor 6
nameplate (6).
8.6 Section 8
Electrical System

Function of the Guard Locking

Switch Circuit

The guard locking switch circuit ensures

that guards are in place and locked before
the motor will start. The circuit also allows
the guards to be opened when the motor
has come to a stop or standstill.
The actuator is typically located on a
removable or hinged guard. The actuator, 1
2
when inserted into the guard locking switch,
locks in place when motion of the motor
shaft is detected by the standstill monitor or
when the start button is pressed. The
actuator is fastened to the guard with
tamper-resistant Torx T-25 fasteners.
The guard locking switch is mounted on a
fixed frame member. The switch contains a
release system, actuator contacts, solenoid
contacts, locking mechanical linkage and
solenoid.
Release system: this system releases 3
the locking mechanical linkage. The system
consists of a manual release (1) on the
switch and a release tool (2). The tool is 4
used to turn the manual release between
the lock and unlock positions. This allows
entry to guarded areas during power
outages or safety circuit malfunction.
Actuator contacts: the actuator contacts Operation of the Guard Locking
detect the insertion of the actuator into the Switch
guard locking switch. The contacts close
when the actuator is inserted. The solenoid (3) when energized pulls
Solenoid contacts: the solenoid contacts the plunger (4) into the solenoid body. The
and the locking mechanical linkage detect plunger moves the locking mechanical
when the solenoid is deenergized and that linkage, which releases the actuator for
the locking mechanical linkage has locked removal. When the solenoid is deenergized,
the actuator in the guard lock switch. The the locking mechanical linkage locks the
contacts are closed in this condition. actuator in the guard locking switch.
NOTE:
The temperature of the guard locking
switch may reach 54°F or 30°C above
ambient temperature.
 Section 8 8.7
Electrical System

Guard Locking Switch Status LED

There are two status LEDs. The red 3

status LED (1) will illuminate when the
solenoid is energized and the actuator can
be removed from the guard lock switch. The
green status LED (2) will illuminate when 2 1
the machine start button is pressed if the
actuator is locked into the guard lock switch.
If the start button is depressed and the
green LED does not illuminate, this is an
indication that the actuator is not locked into 3
the guard lock switch.

Replacing the Guard Locking

Switch

The guard locking switch must be

replaced if it has been damaged or forced
open while locked. The manual release
must be in the “Lock” position when
removing and replacing the lid.
To replace the switch, remove the lid and
verify that the wires at the terminal strip are
clearly marked. Disconnect the wires and
the cord connector. Remove the four
mounting screws under the lid (3).
Install the replacement switch. Use the
mounting screws supplied with the switch.
Replace the wires in the terminal strip,
tighten the cord connector and install the lid.
Tighten the lid screws until there is no gap
between the lid and switch body.
IMPORTANT
Do not substitute the mounting screws
located under the lid of the switch. These
are special screws required for the switch to
function properly.
8.8 Section 8
Electrical System
Function of the Standstill Monitor

The standstill monitor (1) is an 1

electronic device that measures voltage at
the motor terminals and changes a set of
contacts based on the presence or absence
of voltage at the motor terminals. The
standstill monitor consists of an input circuit,
the output circuit contacts and the status
LEDs.
Input circuit: the input signal is the
measured voltage at the motor terminals.
The wires to measure the input signals to
the standstill monitor are connected in
parallel with the wires that connect to the
motor. The standstill monitor detects voltage
when the motor is running or coasting.
The coasting motor acts as a generator
and produces voltage at the terminals. This
voltage is small in comparison to the running
voltage. The presence or absence of any
voltage will cause the standstill monitor
output contacts to change state.
Output circuit: the output contacts are
dependent on the input signal. They will
change state depending on the input
condition and, in turn, control the guard
locking switch state (either energized or
deenergized). The output circuit contacts
have terminals that are labeled. The
normally open (NO) contacts are 13 to 14
and 23 to 24. These contacts control the
guard locking switch.
 Section 8 8.9
Electrical System

Standstill Monitor Status LEDs

The status LEDs illuminate in the

following conditions:
Power LED (1): operating voltage (24
VAC) is supplied to the unit.
Input status LEDs, channel 1 (2) and 1 2
input status LEDs, channel 2 (3):
illuminates when no voltage is being 4 7
measured at the motor terminals. The motor 3
is no longer moving and is considered to be 5 6
at a standstill.
Switching status LED (4): illuminates
after both channels 1 and 2 are lit; indicates
that the output electrical contacts have
changed state. The normally open contacts
13 to 14 and 23 to 24 are closed. The guard
locking switch LEDs are lit.
Fault LED (5): this LED will illuminate if
only one channel is open or both channel
LEDs do not come on simultaneously. The
Switching Status LED and the guard locking
switch LED will not be lit. The Fault LED is
red.
If the LEDs are not lit as indicated, see
Section 9 Troubleshooting.

Safety Relay LEDs

The LEDs on the safety relay will indicate

the status of the system.
K1 (6) and K2 (7) LEDs are both lit: all
circuits are closed and the machine is ready
for operation. These LEDs are green. The
green LED on each guard locking switch
should also be lit.
Only K1 or K2 is lit: the circuit for that
channel (K1 or K2) is interrupted. A fault
exists and the machine will not start.
Both K1 and K2 are not lit: the circuit for
both channels (K1 and K2) is interrupted. A
fault exists and the machine will not start.
If the LEDs are not lit as indicated, see
Section 9 Troubleshooting.
8.10 Section 8
Electrical System

Function of the Variable Frequency 1 2 3

Drive L
+
+ + +
The variable frequency drive (VFD) L1
C
contains three parts: the input section or L2 M
converter (1), the DC bus sections (2) L3
and the output section or inverter (3).
- - -
Three phase power is applied to the -
input section of the drive, called the +
converter. It contains six diodes, arranged -
+
-
in an electrical bridge. These diodes
convert AC power to DC power, which
causes the next section to see a fixed DC
voltage. 5
The DC bus section accepts the DC
voltage. The DC bus section filters and 5
smoothes out the waveform. The diodes 4 7
reconstruct the negative halves of the
waveform onto the positive half. A 460V 6
unit would measure an average DC bus
voltage of about 650V to 680V. This is
calculated as line voltage times 1.414. An 6
inductor and the capacitor (C) work
together to filter out any AC component of 5
the DC waveform. The smoother the DC
waveform, the cleaner the output The control board in the drive signals
waveform from the drive. the gate driver circuits to turn "on" the
The DC bus feeds the final section of waveform positive half or negative half of
the drive, the inverter. This section inverts the IGBT (5). This alternating of positive
the DC voltage back to AC. It does so in a and negative switches recreates the 3
variable voltage and frequency output. phase output. The longer the IGBT
The insulated gate bipolar transistors remains on, the higher the output voltage.
(IGBT) switch the DC bus on and off at The less time the IGBT is on, the lower the
specific intervals. In doing so, the inverter output voltage (bottom graph in the figure
creates a variable AC voltage and above). Similarly, the longer the IGBT is
frequency output (4). Control circuits, off, the lower the output frequency (6). The
called “gate drivers”, cause the control speed at which IGBTs are switched on and
part of the IGBT (the gate) to turn on and off is the carrier frequency, also known as
off as needed. the switch frequency (7). The higher the
switch frequency, the more resolution
each PWM pulse contains. Typical switch
frequencies are 3,000 to 4,000 times per
second (3KHz to 4KHz).
 Section 8 8.11
Electrical System

This page intentionally left blank.

8.12 Section 8
Electrical System
Function of the Electrical System,
Machine with a VFD
The following is a breakdown of the
contact status of the electrical system for a
machine with a variable frequency drive
(VFD) in the following condition: power to
the machine is on, the disconnect switches
(DISC1 and DISC2) are on (auxiliary contact
then closes), and all guards are in place.
The status of contacts for the guard
locking switches and standstill monitor:
Standstill monitor contacts 23 to 24 and 13
to 14 are closed. This allows voltage to
solenoids 1K, 2K and 3K. The solenoids will
be energized and the red LED on the guard
locking switch will be lit. The actuator
contacts 12 to 11 and 22 to 21 will be open
because the guard lock switch solenoid is
energized, even though the actuator is fully
inserted. Safety Relay contacts 13 to 14 and
33 to 34 will be open because both safety
relay input channels are open. The VFD will
be in a Safe Off state. This will remain the
contact condition until the start button is
pressed. All other contacts are in the
positions shown on the schematic.
When the start button is pressed (hold
button for 2 seconds): Voltage can only
energize the CR1 coil because the safety
relay contacts are open. The CR1 coil is
energized. The CR1 contacts change state.
The CR1 normally closed (NC) contacts that
control solenoids 1K, 2K and 3K will open.
This de-energizes the solenoids. The red
LED will go out and the green LED will light
on the guard lock switches. The safety relay
input channels will close. The safety relay
contacts 13 to 14 and 33 to 34 will close.
The VFD will exit the Safe Off state. The
CR2 coil is energized. The CR2 contacts
change state. CR2 normally open contact
will close providing a run signal to the VFD
(terminals SC and S1). CR1, CR2 and
normally open contacts will close, latching
CR1 and CR2. Once the motor starts, the
standstill monitor contacts 13 to 14 and 23
to 24 will change (as shown on the
schematic).
When the stop button is pressed:
Voltage is removed from CR1 and CR2
causing them to de-energize. CR1 and CR2
contacts revert back to their hand held state
(schematic). The CR2 normally open
contacts open, removing the run signal from
the VFD (terminals SC and S1) and the
machine begins to coast to stop. CR1 and
CR2 normally closed contacts close on stop,
resetting SR1 and allowing output voltage
on standstill monitor terminals 14 and 24.
The standstill monitor is detecting motion, so
standstill monitor contacts 23 to 24 and 13
to 14 remain open. After 5-6 seconds of
decelerating, the motor will come to a
complete stop (standstill). Standstill monitor
contacts 13 to 14 and 23 to 24 will close.
This will then allow guard locking switch
solenoids 1K, 2K and 3K to energize,
allowing guards to open. The green LED on
the guard lock switches will go out and the
red LED will illuminate. Safety Relay
contacts 13 to 14 and 33 to 34 will be open
because both safety relay input channels
are open. The VFD will enter the Safe Off
state.
When the emergency stop button is
pressed: Safety Relay contacts 13 to 14
and 33 to 34 will be open because a safety
relay input channel is open and voltage is
removed from CR1 and CR2 causing them
to de-energize. CR1 and CR2 contacts
revert back to their hand held state
(schematic). CR1 and CR2 normally open
latch contacts will open. The VFD will enter
the Safe Off state and the machine begins
to coast to stop. The standstill monitor is
detecting motion, so standstill monitor
contacts 23 to 24 and 13 to 14 remain open.
After 5-6 seconds of decelerating, the motor
will come to a complete stop (standstill).
Standstill monitor contacts 13 to 14 and 23
to 24 will close. The green LED on the
guard lock will go out and the red LED will
illuminate. This will allow guard locking
switch solenoids 1K, 2K and 3K to energize,
and guards can then open.
 Section 8 8.13
Electrical System
Electrical Schematic, machine with VFD
8.14 Section 8
Electrical System
Function of the Electrical System,
Machine with a Soft Start
The following is a breakdown of the
contact status of the electrical system for a
machine with a soft start in the following
condition: power to the machine is on, the
disconnect switches (DISC1 and DISC2) are
on (auxiliary contact then closes), and all
guards are in place.
The status of contacts for the safety
relay, guard locking switches and
standstill monitor: Standstill monitor
contacts 23 to 24 and 13 to 14 are closed.
This allows voltage to solenoids 1K, 2K and
3K. The solenoids will be energized and the
red LED on the guard locking switch will be
lit. The actuator contacts 12 to 11 and 22 to
21 will be open because the solenoid coil is
energized even though the actuator is fully
inserted. Safety Relay contacts 13 to 14 and
23 to 24 will be open because both safety
relay input channels are open. This will
remain the contact condition until the start
button is pressed. All other contacts are in
the positions shown on the schematic.
When the start button is pressed (hold
button for 2 seconds): Voltage can only
energize the CR2 coil because the safety
relay contacts are open, breaking the path
to 1M and the Soft Start Control Terminals.
The CR2 coil is energized. The CR2
contacts change state. The CR2 normally
closed (NC) contacts that control solenoids
1K, 2K and 3K will open. This de-energizes
the solenoids. The red LED on the three
guard lock switches will go out and the
green LEDs will illuminate. The safety relay
input channels will close. The safety relay
contacts will close. 1M and the soft start
control terminals IN1 and IN2 will energize.
The soft starter starting sequence will begin.
Once the motor starts, the standstill monitor
contacts 23 to 24 and 13 to 14 will change
(as shown on the schematic).
When the stop button is pressed:
Voltage is removed from 1M, CR2 and the
Soft Start Control Terminals causing them to
de-energize. 1M and CR2 contacts revert
back to their hand held state (schematic).
1M normally closed auxiliary contact closes
on stop, resetting SR1. The standstill
monitor is detecting motion, so standstill
monitor contacts 23 to 24 and 13 to 14
remain open. After 5-6 seconds of
decelerating, the motor will come to a
complete stop (standstill). Standstill monitor
contacts 13 to 14 and 23 to 24 will close.
This will then allow guard locking switch
solenoids 1K, 2K and 3K to energize,
allowing guards to open. Green LED on
guard lock switches will go out and the red
LED will illuminate. Safety Relay contacts
13 to 14 and 23 to 24 will open because a
safety relay input channel is open.
When the emergency stop button is
pressed: The safety relay contacts 13 to 14
and 23 to 24 will open because a safety
relay input channel is open. Voltage is
removed from 1M and the Soft Start Control
Terminals causing them to de-energize and
then, CR2 will de-energize. 1M contacts
revert back to their hand held state
(schematic). The machine begins to coast to
a stop. The standstill monitor is detecting
motion, so standstill monitor contacts 23 to
24 and 13 to 14 remain open. After 5-6
seconds of decelerating, the motor will come
to a complete stop (standstill). Standstill
monitor contacts 13 to 14 and 23 to 24 will
close. This will then allow guard locking
switch solenoids 1K, 2K and 3K to energize,
allowing guards to open. Green LED on the
guard lock switch will go out and the red
LED will illuminate.
 Section 8 8.15
Electrical System
Electrical Schematic, machine with a soft start
8.16

This page intentionally left blank.

 9.1

Section 9
Troubleshooting
Flow Charts, Machine with a VFD
Purpose and Contents of this Problem: The machine will not start.
Section Flowchart 1, Machine with a VFD: Isolating the fault . . . . 9.8
Flowchart 2, Machine with a VFD: Checking
input loops to the safety relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
The Troubleshooting Section includes Problem: A guard will not open; the guard locking switch
solutions for problems with product output, will not release the actuator.
mechanical troubleshooting, and electrical Flowchart 3, Machine with a VFD: Checking for an
troubleshooting. This section is intended electrical problem in the guard locking switch circuit . . 9.14
as a guide for trained maintenance Problem: The machine stops due to an overload
personnel. Flowchart 4, Machine with a VFD: Isolating the cause
of motor overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16
This section includes the following Checking for a balanced power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.17
topics: Flow Charts, Machine with a Soft Start
Problem: The machine will not start.
Contents Page Flowchart 5, Machine with a Soft Start: Isolating the fault. 9.18
Size or Shape of Cut Flowchart 6, Machine with a Soft Start: Checking
Problem: The dices are not uniform or input loops to the safety relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
the product is crushed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Problem: A guard will not open; the guard locking switch
Sounds and noises coming from the machine that may will not release the actuator.
indicate a mechanical problem Flowchart 7, Machine with a Soft Start: Checking for an
Problem: Harsh, metallic, grinding sound . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 electrical problem in the guard locking switch circuit . . 9.24
Problem: Regular or intermittent clicking sound . . . . . . . 9.2 Problem: The machine stops due to an overload
Problem: Irregular chattering sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Flowchart 8, Machine with a Soft Start: Isolating the
Electrical System and Motor, cause of motor overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26
Electrical Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Checking for a balanced power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.27
Problem: The machine will not start. Problem: Slow, sluggish operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
Items to check before proceeding to the flowcharts . . . 9.4 Problem: Cutting parts are still in motion when a
guard is open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
Problem: The pilot light does not illuminate when
the machine is running. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
Size and Shape of Cut
Problem: The dices are not uniform or the product is crushed.
Cause Correction
Knives are improperly Knives must be correctly sharpened or replaced. See Section
sharpened 7: Service and Repair, Knife Care.

Product build-up on the Clean the knives thoroughly.

knives
Knives are dull or Replace the knives. Avoid using undersized and new knives
undersized from together.
sharpening

Incorrect speed of dicing Use the correct dicing unit speed for the product being cut.
unit

Feed rate is too high Adjust the feed rate. See Section 4: Operation, Feeding
Method.
9.2 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Sounds and noises coming from the machine that may indicate a
mechanical problem
Problem: Harsh, metallic grinding sound.
Cause Correction
Circular knives rubbing Check that circular knives are centered in the slots of the
against the slots in the slicing knife. If knives are not centered, check that both the
slicing knife slicing knife and circular support assembly are fully seated.
Circular knives rubbing Check for a bent stripper plate; straighten or replace as
against the stripper plate necessary.
Worn motor bearings Run the motor with the belt removed to verify. If the motor
needs repair, contact an Urschel representative for the
location of the nearest authorized motor service center.

Problem: Regular or intermittent clicking sound.

Cause Correction
Crosscut knives striking Check for bent or damaged crosscut knives. Make sure the
the slicing knife holder knives are fully seated on the spindle. Crinkle crosscut knives
must be used with the crinkle slicing knife and slicing knife
holder.
The crosscut spindle assembly may be out of adjustment. Use
the crosscut setting tool to check the position of the bearing
spindle. See Section 7 Service and Repair, Installing the
Bearing Spindle Assemblies.

Problem: Irregular chattering sound.

Cause Correction
Worn pulleys Check for worn or damaged timing pulleys and replace. Rapid
wear can be caused by worn bearings or shafts.

Worn timing belt or Replace the timing belt or pulleys.

pulleys
 Section 9 9.3
Troubleshooting

Electrical System and Motor Problem: The machine will not start.

 WARNING
A qualified electrician should inspect or Items to check before proceeding to
repair the electrical system. Voltages the Flowcharts, Pages 9.4-9.7
dangerous to life exist in the electrical Machine with a VFD Machine with a Soft Start
enclosure! If incoming power to the
machine is on, live voltages are still
present in the enclosure even though Flowchart 1 Flowchart 5
the disconnect switch is off. Isolating the fault, Isolating the fault,
Disconnect incoming power to the Page 9.8 Page 9.18
machine before beginning electrical
inspection or repair.
Flowchart 2 Flowchart 6
NOTICE Checking input loops to Checking input loops to
This machine has two disconnect the safety relay, Page 9.12 the safety relay, Page 9.22
switches. The disconnect switch with
the extended shaft (1) controls power to
the motor and starting control circuit. The
main disconnect switch (2) controls Problem: A guard will not open.
power to the entire electrical system. Machine with a VFD Machine with a Soft Start

Electrical Troubleshooting
Overview Flowchart 3 Flowchart 7
Checking for an electrical Checking for an electrical
The diagram at the right shows an problem in the guard problem in the guard
overview of the approach to locking switch circuit, locking switch circuit,
troubleshooting various problems with the Page 9.14 Page 9.24
electrical system and motor.

Problem: Motor stops due to an overload

Machine with a VFD Machine with a Soft Start

Flowchart 4 Flowchart 8
2 Isolating the cause of motor Isolating the cause of motor
overload, Page 9.16 overload, Page 9.26

Other electrical problems

Page 9.28
1
9.4 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start.
Items to check before proceeding to the flowcharts
Cause Correction
No power to the The machine must be connected to a power source.
machine
Disconnect switches 1 Turn both disconnect switches 1 and 2 (1, 2) on.
and/or 2 are off
1

The emergency stop When the stop button is depressed, the circuit will remain open
button has not been reset until the button is reset; rotate and pull out to reset.

The manual release on Use the release tool (3) to rotate the
one or more guard manual release (4) to the locked position.
locking switches is in the Check all switches.
unlocked position 4
3

One or more guards are Close and latch all guards.

not closed completely
and latched
 Section 9 9.5
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)
Items to check before proceeding to the flowcharts (continued)
Cause Correction
Open short circuit The machine is equipped with either mini circuit breakers (1)
protective device or fuses. See the label on or near the device for identification.
(SCPD)
(tripped circuit breaker Check the following:
or blown fuse) Main circuit breakers (MCB1) or 1
fuses (FU1);
Primary circuit breakers or fuses
(MCB2 or FU2) for the transformer;
Secondary circuit breakers or
fuses (MCB3, FU3) for the
transformer.

To reset a circuit breaker, flip the switch.

To check a fuse, turn the disconnect switch off. Remove the
fuse and check with an ohmmeter or continuity tester. If the
fuse is faulty, it will measure infinite resistance. If the fuse is
good, it will measure 1 to 10 ohms. Replace the fuse with the
same type.
If the circuit breaker trips or the fuse fails again, check for a
short circuit.

Motor overload, Press the reset button on the enclosure door.

VFD fault or If the motor continues to overload, see below and Flowchart 4:
soft start fault Isolating the cause of motor overload.

Machine with a VFD: The VFD display

may show a fault or warning. Note the
error code on the display (2). Turn the 3
disconnect switch off. Refer to the VFD
manual supplied with the machine.
Correct the fault or warning. Turn the
disconnect switch on. If the error code is
still displayed, contact an Urschel service
representative.

Machine with a soft start: The soft start

RUN/FAULT LED (3) will be blinking.
Count the number of flashes to determine
the type of fault as shown on the label and 3
in the manufacturer's literature supplied
with the machine. Correct the fault.
9.6 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)
Items to check before proceeding to the flowcharts (continued)
Cause Correction
The actuator is not The actuator (1) may be
aligned with or far misaligned or not far enough into
enough into the guard the guard locking switch (2) to
locking switch lock the guard and allow the
or machine to start. Inspect the guard
The guard locking switch locking switches for misalignment
or actuator has been between the actuator and switch.
damaged by excessive Inspect the actuator and straighten
force applied to open the or replace if it is bent. If
guard misalignment is due to a bent guard, 1 2
straighten the guard to realign the
actuator or replace the guard.

If the actuator cannot be realigned

by straightening the guard, the
actuator must be adjusted. Close
the guard slowly and watch the
actuator as it enters the switch. The
6 4
actuator is spring loaded, and under 5
normal conditions may move slightly 3
as it enters the switch.
.120" (3 mm)
The actuator base has slotted maximum
holes to allow side-to-side
adjustment. Use the T-25 Torx wrench supplied with the
machine to loosen the fasteners (3). The clearance between
the actuator base (4) and actuator guide (5) should be no
more than .120" (3 mm). If this distance is too great, install a
spacer (6) behind the actuator (see Section 10 Parts: Guard
Locking Switch and Enclosure Fittings). Apply a thread locking
compound and tighten the fasteners securely after adjusting.

After adjustments, test the switch for proper function. If the

guard locking switch fails to lock, the switch is damaged and
must be replaced. This condition can occur if excessive force
was applied to open the guard while the switch was locked.

If a guard will not open, see Flowchart 3: Checking for an

electrical problem in the guard locking switch circuit.
 Section 9 9.7
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)
Items to check before proceeding to the flowcharts (continued)
Cause Correction
Machine with a variable Verify the power to the machine, then check the main short
frequency drive (VFD): circuit protective device (SCPD), MCB1 or FU1.

The VFD has no display If the SCPD has not failed, turn
the main disconnect switch off.
Remove the cover plate from
the VFD. Turn the disconnect
switch on. Use a voltmeter to
measure the voltage at
terminals L1 to L2, L2 to L3, L1 L2 L3
and L1 to L3. The voltage
should be the same for each
pair of terminals (the measured
voltage should be the machine
supply voltage). If all three
voltages measure the same,
the VFD has probably failed.
9.8 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)
Flowchart 1, Machine with a VFD: Isolating the fault

1 Check the LEDs (1) on each Guard Locking Switch.

Are red LEDs lit?
No Open the electrical enclosure.
1AIs the power LED (2) on the standstill monitor lit?
No Check fuses or MCBs (3); replace or reset if faulty or tripped. If fuses have
not failed or MCBs have not tripped, go to <2>.
Yes Go to <2>
Yes Go to <2>

1 3

2 Press and hold the start button. Check the LEDs (4) on each Guard Locking
Switch. (This step and several following steps require two people.)
Are the green LEDs lit?
Yes Control Relay CR1 (5) is not energizing or CR1 normally closed contact is not
opening. Contact Urschel for assistance.
No Go to <3>

5
4

continued on the next page

 Section 9 9.9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)
Flowchart 1, Machine with a VFD: Isolating the fault (continued)

3 Press and hold the start button. Unlatch the guards.

Do any guards open? (Do not force the guard if it will not open.)
Yes The actuator is not engaged in the guard lock switch. See Items to check before
proceeding to the flowcharts on the previous pages.
No Go to <4>
4 Press and hold the start button.
Are K1 and K2 LEDs (1) on the Safety Relay both lit?
No There is a problem with the input devices to the Safety Relay or the Safety Relay
has failed. Go to Flowchart 2: Checking input loops to the safety relay.
Yes Go to <5>

5 Press and hold the start button.

Is the green pilot light (2) on the enclosure lit?
No Control Relay CR2 may not be energizing. Check the wiring from the Safety Relay
to the pilot light (3) and CR2. Measure voltage at terminals A1 and A2 (4) of
Control Relay CR2. If 21-27 VAC is measured, the pilot light module has failed.
(Note that a failed pilot light will not prevent the machine from starting.) Go to <6>. If
0-2 VAC is measured, contact Urschel.
Yes Go to <6>

2 3

continued on the next page

9.10 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)
Flowchart 1, Machine with a VFD: Isolating the fault (continued)

6 Press and hold the start button.

Is the ALM LED (1) on the VFD lit or blinking?
Yes The VFD has faulted. The VFD display indicates the specific fault. See the
manufacturer's literature or contact Urschel for assistance.
No Go to <7>

7 Press and hold the start button.

Is the RUN LED (2) on the VFD lit or blinking?
Lit There is no VFD fault. Check the output voltage at T1, T2 and T3 terminals (3) on
the VFD. Contact Urschel if assistance is needed.
Blinking Measure voltage at terminals SC and S1 (4) on the VFD. Place one meter lead
on terminal SC and the other on S1 (continue to hold the start button).
If 0-1 VDC is measured, the VFD may be faulty; contact Urschel for assistance.
If 0-1 VDC is not measured, check for 21-27 VAC at terminals A1 and A2 on control
relay CR2 (see Step 5). If 24 VAC is measured, check continuity of auxiliary
contacts and wires 26 and 27 at CR2 (5). If continuity is not detected, the control
relay may have failed. If continuity is detected, contact Urschel for assistance.

5
2

5
3

END
 Section 9 9.11
Troubleshooting

This page intentionally left blank.

9.12 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)

Flowchart 2, Machine with a VFD: Checking input loops to the safety relay

1 Turn DISC 1 and DISC 2 off. Remove the following wires (1) from the safety
relay terminals:
Wire 19 from terminal S10,
Wire 10 from terminal S12,
Wire 9 from terminal S21.
Check continuity in the S10 to S13 loop. Connect one meter lead to wire 19 (2).
Use the other meter lead (3) to check terminals 18, 16 and 14 on the terminal block,
and finally wire 12 at safety relay terminal S13 (4). See the detail of the electrical
schematic (5).
Is there continuity at each terminal location?
No Check the guard locking switch for faulty contacts and loose or broken wires
between terminals. Contact Urschel if assistance is needed.
Yes Go to <2>

4
2
3
1

1 1

Input loops to the Safety Relay:

Terminals S10 to S13
Terminals S11 to S12
Terminals S21 to S14

continued on the next page

 Section 9 9.13
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)

Flowchart 2, Machine with a VFD: Checking input loops to the safety relay (continued)

2 Check continuity in the S11 to S12 loop. Connect one meter lead to wire 10 (1).
Use the other meter lead (2) to check terminals 17, 15 and 13 on the terminal block,
and finally wire 11 at safety relay terminal S11 (3). See the detail of the electrical
schematic on the previous page.
Is there continuity at each terminal location?
No Check the guard lock switch for faulty contacts and loose or broken wires between
terminals. Contact Urschel if assistance is needed.
Yes Go to <3>

1 2

3 Check continuity in the S21 to S14 loop.

Connect one meter lead to wire 9 (4). Use the other meter lead (5) to check
terminals 10, 17, 15 and 13 on the terminal block, and finally wire 11 on safety relay
terminal S14 (6). See the detail of the wiring diagram on the previous page.
Is there continuity at each wire location?
No Check for faulty contacts at the control relays. Contact Urschel if assistance is
needed.
Yes Go to <4>

4
5 6

4 Reconnect wires 19, 10 and 9 to the safety relay. Turn DISC 1 and DISC 2 on. Press
and hold the start button.
Are K1 and K2 LEDs (7) on the safety relay both lit?
Yes If the machine does not start, contact Urschel.
No Replace the safety relay.

END
9.14 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: A guard will not open; the guard locking switch will not release the actuator.

Flowchart 3, Machine with a VFD: Checking for an electrical problem in the guard lock
switch circuit

1 Is the red LED (1) on the Guard Locking Switch lit?

Yes Use the release tool (2) to unlock the switch and open the guard. Check the
actuator for damage or misalignment; see the topic pertaining to the guard locking
switch in Items to check before proceeding to the flowcharts. If the actuator is not
damaged or misaligned, remove the lid on the guard lock switch and close the
guard. Start and stop the machine. When the motor comes to a stop, the plunger
(3) should pull into the solenoid (4) and the red LED should illuminate. If the
solenoid does not operate as described, the switch has failed. Replace the switch.
If the actuator will not release from the switch, the switch may be damaged. Contact
Urschel for assistance.
No Go to <2>

1 2
4

2 Open the electrical enclosure.

Is the POWER LED (5) on the standstill monitor lit?
No Check Fuses or MCBs 1, 2 and 3. If these devices have not failed or tripped, check
for 21-27 VAC at terminals A1 and A2 (6) on the PILZ standstill monitor. If 21-27
VAC is measured, the standstill monitor has probably failed; contact Urschel for
additional assistance.
Yes Go to <3>

continued on the next page

 Section 9 9.15
Troubleshooting
Problem: A guard will not open; the guard locking switch will not release the actuator.
(continued)
Flowchart 3, Machine with a VFD: Checking for an electrical problem in the guard lock
switch circuit (continued)

3 Are the OUPUT, CH.1 IN and CH.2 IN LEDs (1) on the

standstill monitor lit? 2
No Check wires 1T1, 1T2 and 1T3 at the top of the
terminal block (2) on the standstill monitor.
1
Yes Go to <4>

4 Measure the voltage at terminals 2 and 21 (3) for the switches on the feed cover
and in the support housing. Measure at terminals 2 and 23 (4) for the switch on the
frame leg. To ensure accurate testing, use the number 2 terminal that corresponds to
the circuit being tested. Remove the covers from the wire ducts and follow the switch
leads to the terminal block. Identify the number 2 terminal associated with the switch
lead.
Is 21-27 VAC measured?
No There is a broken or loose wire or the contacts in the Control Relay CR1 are not
closing. Check wires 1, 20, 21 and 2 for the switches on the feed cover and in the
support housing, and wires 1, 22, 23 and 2 for the switch on the frame leg. See the
schematic and check at each component. Contact Urschel if assistance is needed.
Yes Remove the lid on the guard locking switch and measure voltage at terminals A1
and A2 (5). If 21-27 VAC is measured, the guard locking switch is faulty. If 21-27
VAC is not measured, the cable may have failed. Contact Urschel if assistance is
needed.
3 4 5

END
9.16 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The motor stops due to an overload.
Flowchart 4, Machine with a VFD: Isolating the cause of motor
overload 1
ALM LED on the VFD is lit or blinking and the display shows “oL1”
or “oL2” (1).

1 Measure motor Full Load Amperage on all three phases.

Measure with the machine running and no product being
processed. Use an amperage clamp (3) to measure amperage at terminals 1T1,
1T2 and 1T3 (4). Measure the amperage for three different pairs of terminals.
Is the amperage on any phase above 50% of the motor Full Load Amperage
listed on the motor nameplate (5)?
No Verify the following:
Machine is properly lubricated
Knives are not dull
No product in the impeller at start-up
Feed rate is not excessive.
Also verify that the VFD constants are the same as the voltage specified on the
schematic inside the electrical enclosure. See the VFD manufacturer's literature
supplied with the machine for information on checking the constants.
Yes Go to <2>

continued on the next page

 Section 9 9.17
Troubleshooting
Problem: The motor stops due to an overload. (continued)
Flowchart 4, Machine with a VFD: Isolating the cause of motor overload (continued)

2 Disconnect the drive belt. Use an amperage clamp to measure amperage on all
three phases as described in Step 1.
Is any phase above 50% of the motor Full Load Amperage listed on the
nameplate?
No The problem is likely mechanical. Verify that the spindles are free to rotate. Contact
Urschel for additional assistance.
Yes Go to <3>
3 Run the machine at operating speed and measure the voltage at terminals 1T1,
1T2 and 1T3 (1).
Is the voltage balanced within 1% phase-to-phase?
No The VFD may have failed. Contact Urschel for assistance. Incoming power may be
unbalanced. See “Checking for a Balanced Power Supply” below.
Yes There is a problem with the motor. Inspect the motor and repair if necessary.

END

Checking for a Balanced Power Supply

Phase-to-phase voltage must be balanced within 1% to prevent motor overload. Measure the voltage at three different pairs
of terminals on disconnect DISC1. See the sample calculation below.

Example (The calculation below is an example; measurements will vary.)

Step 1: Measure voltage at three Step 3: Select the measured voltage Step 5: Determine the percent voltage
different pairs of terminals: with the greatest deviation from the deviation:
L1-L2 measurement: 483 Volts average: 100.0
L1-L3 measurement: 481 Volts x 3.3 (deviation)
L2-L3 measurement: 477 Volts L2-L3 measurement: 477 Volts 330.0
÷ 480.3 (average voltage)
Step 2: Calculate the average voltage: Step 4: Calculate deviation from the 0.69%
average voltage.
483
481 480.3 (average voltage) Result: The percent calculated is less
+ 477 - 477.0 (greatest deviation) than 1%; the voltage is balanced
1441 3.3 phase-to-phase.
÷ 3
480.3
9.18 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)
Flowchart 5, Machine with a Soft Start: Isolating the fault

1 Check the LEDs on each Guard Locking Switch.

Are the red LEDs (1) lit?
No Open the electrical enclosure.
1AIs the power LED (2) on the standstill monitor lit?
No Check fuses or MCBs (3); replace or reset if faulty or tripped. If fuses have
not failed or MCBs have not tripped, go to <2>.
Yes Go to <2>
Yes Go to <2>

3
2
1

2 Press and hold the start button. Check the LEDs on each Guard Locking
Switch. (This step and several following steps require two people.)
Are the green LEDs (4) lit?
Yes Control Relay CR2 (5) is not energizing or CR2 normally closed contact is not
opening. The LED (6) is lit when the control relay is energized. Contact Urschel for
assistance.
No Go to <3>

continued on the next page

 Section 9 9.19
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)
Flowchart 5, Machine with a Soft Start: Isolating the fault (continued)

3 Press and hold the start button. Unfasten the latch (1) on a guard.
Do any guards open? (Do not force the guard if it will not open.)
Yes The actuator is not engaged in the guard lock switch. See Items to check before
proceeding to the flowcharts on the previous pages.
No Go to <4>

4 Press and hold the start button.

Are K1 and K2 LEDs (2) on the Safety Relay both lit?
No There is a problem with the input devices to the Safety Relay or the Safety Relay
has failed. Go to Flowchart 6: Checking input loops to the safety relay.
Yes Go to <5>

continued on the next page

9.20 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)
Flowchart 5, Machine with a Soft Start: Isolating the fault (continued)

5 Press and hold the start button.

Is the green pilot light (1) on the enclosure lit?
No The soft start and 1M contactor may not be energizing. Check the wiring from the
safety relay to the pilot light (2) and 1M contactor (3). Measure the voltage (4) at
terminals A1 to A2 of 1M contactor. If 21-27 VAC is measured, the pilot light module
has failed. (Note that a failed pilot light will not prevent the machine from starting.) If
21-27 VAC is not measured, go to <6>.
Yes Go to <6>

1 2

6 Press and hold the start button.

Does the RUN/FAULT LED (5) on the soft start blink to indicate a fault?
Yes The label on the soft start shows the number of flashes (6) and corresponding
fault. See the soft start manufacturer's literature or contact Urschel.
No Press and hold the start button. Place one meter lead (7) on soft start terminal A2
and the other on terminal IN1 and then on IN2. (Note that the overload reset
solenoid (8) has been removed in the photo for clarity.) If 21-27 VAC is measured,
check the control relay (9). If the control relay is energizing, check the 1M auxiliary
contact and wires 8 and 9. If the wires are in place and secure, go to <7>.

6 5

continued on the next page

 Section 9 9.21
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)
Flowchart 5, Machine with a Soft Start: Isolating the fault (continued)

7 Press and hold the start button. Measure voltage at terminals T1-T3 (1) of soft
start. Is main power voltage measured?
Yes Press and hold the start button. Measure input voltage at the upper terminals (2)
on the 1M contactor (wires 1T1-1T3). If main power voltage is measured, measure
the output at wires 2T1-2T3 on the lower terminals (3). If main power voltage is
measured, the problem could be the motor. See the following pages for
troubleshooting a motor problem or contact Urschel for assistance.
No Press and hold the start button. At the soft start, measure input power at terminals
L1-L3 (4). If main power voltage is measured, the soft start is probably faulty.

END
9.22 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)

Flowchart 6, Machine with a Soft Start: Checking input loops to the safety relay

1 Turn DISC 1 and DISC 2 off. Remove the following wires (1) from the safety
relay terminals:
Wire 22 from terminal S10,
Wire 21 from terminal S12,
Wire 12 from terminal S21.
Check continuity in the S10 to S13 loop. Connect one meter lead to wire 22 (2).
Use the other meter lead (3) to check terminals 20, 18 and 16 on the terminal block,
and finally wire 14 at safety relay terminal S13 (4). See the detail of the electrical
schematic (5).
Is there continuity at each terminal location?
No Check the guard locking switch for faulty contacts and loose or broken wires
between terminals. Contact Urschel for further assistance.
Yes Go to <2>

1 3

2
1
1

Input loops to the Safety Relay:

Terminals S10 to S13
Terminals S11 to S12
Terminals S14 to S21

continued on the next page

 Section 9 9.23
Troubleshooting
Problem: The machine will not start. (continued)

Flowchart 6, Machine with a Soft Start: Checking input loops to the safety relay
(continued)
2 Check continuity in the S11 to S12 loop. Connect one meter lead to wire 21 (1).
Use the other meter lead (2) to check terminals 19, 17 and 15 on the terminal block,
and finally wire 13 at safety relay terminal S11 (3). See the detail of the electrical
schematic on the previous page.
Is there continuity at each terminal location?
No Check the guard lock switch for faulty contacts and loose or broken wires between
terminals. Contact Urschel if assistance is needed.
Yes Go to <3>

3 Check continuity in the S14 to S21 loop.

Connect one meter lead to wire 12 (4). Use the other meter lead to check terminal
12 (5) and wire 21 (6) from the safety relay. See the detail of the wiring diagram on
the previous page.
Is there continuity at each wire location?
No Check for faulty contacts at the terminals. Contact Urschel for further assistance.
Yes Go to <5>

6
5 Reconnect wires 22, 21 and
4
12 to the safety relay. Turn
DISC 1 and DISC 2 on.
Press and hold the start
button.
Are K1 and K2 LEDs (7) on the safety relay both lit?
Yes If the machine does not start, contact Urschel.
No Replace the safety relay. 7

END
9.24 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: A guard will not open; the guard locking switch will not release the actuator.

Flowchart 7, Machine with a Soft Start: Checking for an electrical problem in the guard
lock switch circuit

1 Is the LED (1) on the Guard Locking Switch lit?

Yes Use the release tool (2) to unlock the switch and open the guard. Check the
actuator for damage or misalignment; see the topic pertaining to the guard locking
switch in Items to check before proceeding to the flowcharts. If the actuator is not
damaged or misaligned, remove the lid on the guard lock switch and close the
guard. Start and stop the machine. When the motor comes to a stops, the plunger
(3) should pull into the solenoid (4) and the red LED should illuminate. If the
solenoid does not operate as described, the switch has failed. Replace the switch.
If the actuator will not release from the switch, the switch may be damaged. Contact
Urschel for assistance.
No Go to <2>

1 2
4

2 Open the electrical enclosure.

Is the POWER LED (5) on the standstill monitor lit?
No Check Fuses or MCBs 1, 2 and 3. If these devices have not failed or tripped, check
for 21-27 VAC at terminals A1 and A2 (6) on the PILZ standstill monitor. If 21-27
VAC is measured, the standstill monitor has probably failed; contact Urschel for
additional assistance.
Yes Go to <3>

6
5

continued on the next page

 Section 9 9.25
Troubleshooting
Problem: A guard will not open; the guard locking switch will not release the actuator.
(continued)
Flowchart 7, Machine with a Soft Start: Checking for an electrical problem in the guard
lock switch circuit (continued)

3 Are the OUPUT, CH.1 IN and CH.2 IN LEDs (1) on the

standstill monitor lit?
No Check wires 1T1, 1T2 and 1T3 at the top of the terminal 2
block (2) on the standstill monitor.
Yes Go to <4> 1

4 Measure the voltage at terminals 2 and 24 (3) for the switches on the feed cover
and in the support housing. Measure at terminals 2 and 26 (4) for the switch on the
frame leg. To ensure accurate testing, use the number 2 terminal that corresponds to
the circuit being tested. Remove the covers from the wire ducts and follow the switch
leads to the terminal block. Identify the number 2 terminal associated with the switch
lead.
Is 21-27 VAC measured?
No There is a broken or loose wire or the contacts in the Control Relay CR2 are not
closing. Check wires 1, 23, 24 and 2 for the switches on the feed cover and in the
support housing, and wires 1, 25, 26 and 2 for the switch on the frame leg. Also
check wire 1; see the schematic and check at each component. Contact Urschel if
assistance is needed.
Yes Remove the lid on the guard locking switch and measure voltage at terminals A1
and A2 (5). If 21-27 VAC is measured, the guard locking switch is faulty. If 21-27
VAC is not measured, the cable may have failed. Contact Urschel if assistance is
needed.
3 4 5

END
9.26 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: The motor stops due to an overload.
Flowchart 8, Machine with a Soft Start: Isolating the cause of
motor overload
Run/Fault LED (1) on the soft start blinks once and then pauses.

1 Measure motor Full Load Amperage on all three

phases. Measure with the machine running and no product
being processed. Use an amperage clamp (2) to measure
1
amperage at the wires (3) at the bottom of the 1M
contactor.
Is the amperage on any phase above 85% of the motor
Full Load Amperage (FLA) listed on the motor nameplate (4)?
No Verify the following:
Machine is properly lubricated
Knives are not dull
No product in the impeller at start-up
Feed rate is not excessive.
Overload setting (5) on the soft start is the same as the motor full load amperage
(FLA)
Yes Go to <2>

5
3
2

continued on the next page

 Section 9 9.27
Troubleshooting
Problem: The motor stops due to an overload. (continued)
Flowchart 8, Machine with a Soft Start: Isolating the cause of motor overload
(continued)

2 Disconnect the drive belt. Use an amperage clamp to measure amperage on all
three phases as described in Step 1.
Is any phase above 85% of the motor Full Load Amperage listed on the
nameplate?
No The problem is likely mechanical. Verify that the spindles are free to rotate. Contact
Urschel for additional assistance.
Yes Go to <3>
3 Run the machine at operating speed and measure the voltage at the terminals
(1) for wires 2T1, 2T2 and 2T3 at the bottom of the 1M contactor.
Is the voltage at least 95% of the specified voltage and balanced within 1%
phase-to-phase?
No Contact Urschel for assistance. Incoming power may be unbalanced. See “Checking
for a Balanced Power Supply” below.
Yes There is a problem with the motor. Inspect the motor and repair if necessary.

END

Checking for a Balanced Power Supply

Phase-to-phase voltage must be balanced within 1% to prevent motor overload. Measure the voltage at three different pairs
of terminals on disconnect DISC1. See the sample calculation below.

Example (The calculation below is an example; measurements will vary.)

Step 1: Measure voltage at three Step 3: Select the measured voltage Step 5: Determine the percent voltage
different pairs of terminals: with the greatest deviation from the deviation:
L1-L2 measurement: 483 Volts average: 100.0
L1-L3 measurement: 481 Volts x 3.3 (deviation)
L2-L3 measurement: 477 Volts L2-L3 measurement: 477 Volts 330.0
÷ 480.3 (average voltage)
Step 2: Calculate the average voltage: Step 4: Calculate deviation from the 0.69%
average voltage.
483
481 480.3 (average voltage) Result: The percent calculated is less
+ 477 - 477.0 (greatest deviation) than 1%; the voltage is balanced
1441 3.3 phase-to-phase.
÷ 3
480.3
9.28 Section 9
Troubleshooting
Problem: Slow, sluggish operation.
Cause Correction
Lack of lubrication or See lubrication information in Section 5 Routine Maintenance
improper lubricant and Cleaning.

Problem: Cutting parts are still in motion when a guard is opened.

Cause Correction
The correct stopping Correct stopping procedures must be followed for safe
procedure has not been operation. See Section 4, Operation: Stopping Procedure.
followed
Safety system failure Check the safety system and repair or replace parts as
needed. See Section 1, Safety and Section 8, Electrical
System.

Problem: The pilot light does not illuminate when the machine is running.
Cause Correction
The pilot light module To check the pilot light module, first start the machine. Inside
has failed the electrical enclosure, use a meter to measure the voltage at
the pilot light module (1). Place one meter lead on wire
number 8 (VFD) or 11 (soft start) and the other lead on wire
number 2.
If 21-27 VAC is measured and the pilot light is not illuminated,
replace the pilot light module.
If 21-27 VAC is not measured and the machine is running,
check for a loose number 8 (VFD) or 11 (soft start) wire, or
number 2 wire on the terminals.
Machine with
Soft Start
Machine
with VFD

1 1
 Section 9 9.29
Troubleshooting

This page intentionally left blank.

w w w . u r s c h e l . c o m

CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS
1200 Cutting Edge Drive
Chesterton, Indiana 46304 U.S.A.
Corporate: +1.219.464.4811 Fax: +1.219.462.3879
Toll Free: +1.844.URSCHEL (877.2435)
www.urschel.com
Technical Publication inquiries: techpubs@urschel.com
Other inquiries: info@urschel.com
Subsidiaries and sales offices in principal cities worldwide.

The Global Leader in Food Cutting Technology™

Publication Number Publication Description

L2855 MANUAL, ENGLISH, INSTRUCTION, SPRINT 2
 ®

The Global Leader in Food Cutting Technology

Section 10
Parts

Sprint 2™ Dicer
Model MSPR2
Parts Manual

E
Language
Code

English
10.2

This page intentionally left blank.

 10.3

Sprint 2™ Dicer
Model MSPR2
Parts Manual
Publication Description: MANUAL, ENGLISH, PARTS, SPRINT 2
Publication Number: L2856
Date issued: August 2015

URSCHEL
CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS
1200 Cutting Edge Drive
Chesterton, Indiana 46304 U.S.A.
Corporate: +1.219.464.4811
Fax: +1.219.462.3879
Toll Free: +1.844.URSCHEL (877.2435)
www.urschel.com
Inquiries regarding Technical Publications: techpubs@urschel.com
All other inquiries: info@urschel.com

Subsidiaries and sales offices are located in principal cities worldwide. See the website for the location of the
nearest office.

This instruction manual contains the most recent information available and represents the machine as it is
currently manufactured at the time of publication. Urschel Laboratories reserves the right to make changes at
any time without notice. If your machine contains parts not shown, or if there are any questions regarding the
safe operation of this machine, contact Urschel Laboratories or your Urschel representative.

COPYRIGHT© 2015 Urschel Laboratories, Inc., Valparaiso, Indiana. All rights reserved. No part of this manual
may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying and recording, for any purpose without the express written permission of Urschel Laboratories, Inc.

® ™ Urschel, DiversaCut and DiversaCut 2110 are registered trademarks and DiversaCut 2110A and
Urschelube are pending trademarks of Urschel Laboratories, Inc.
® Acetron is a registered trademark of Quadrant EPP.
® Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.
® Loctite is a registered trademark of Henkel Corp.
® Never-Seez is a registered trademark of Bostik, Inc.
® Nylok is a registered trademark of Nylok Fastener Corp.
10.4 Section 10, Parts
Using this Manual

Message to the User Instruction and Parts Manuals

Use this Parts Manual with the This Parts Manual is included with the
Instruction Manual. The Instruction Instruction Manual. These manuals may be
Manual contains safety, installation, updated independently. Visit the Urschel
operation and service information and must website at www.urschel.com to check for
be read and understood by all persons the latest publications for your machine.
using this machine.
Learn and follow all the safety rules Ordering Technical Publications
and operating principles in the Instruction
Manual. Follow all warnings, cautions, and To obtain a manual, contact your
other safety messages in this manual and Urschel representative or request a
on the machine. Recognize the safety manual through the company website at
alert symbol  , which indicates a www.urschel.com. You can also email your
potential personal safety hazard. request to techpubs@urschel.com. Please
If there are any questions regarding the include the machine model, serial number,
safe operation of this machine, contact the name of your company and the
your Urschel representative. language required.
Manuals are available in printed and
Messages in the Manual electronic forms. Most manuals are
available in several languages. Printed
The following messages may be used in manuals and electronic media (CD-ROM
this manual: disks and USB drives) are free of charge
and postage paid.
 CAUTION Publications are reviewed and updated
This alert is followed by a statement that regularly. Check the Urschel website for
describes a potential hazard which may the latest publications for your machine.
result in minor injury.
 WARNING
This alert is followed by a statement that
describes a potential hazard that could
result in serious injury or death.
 DANGER
This alert is followed by a statement that
describes a potential hazard that will result
in serious injury or death.
NOTICE
This word is followed by a statement that
alerts you to key information or
instructions.
IMPORTANT
This word is followed by a statement that
alerts you to machine conditions that must
be verified or corrected, or damage to the
machine may occur.
 Section 10, Parts 10.5
Contents
Section 10 Parts
Ordering Parts, Returning Parts for Credit
or Repair, Motor Warranty and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Optional Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
Floor Stand, Covers and Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
Safety Signs and Machine Labels, feed cover with extension. . . . 10.14
Slice Gate and Related Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
Dicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.18
Strip Cutting with the Circular Knife Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . 10.20
Strip Cutting with the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly. . . . . . . . 10.22
Slicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
Shredding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
Water Spray System for the Cutting Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.28
Impellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.30
Circular Spindle Support Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.32
Circular Spindle Support Assembly with Grease Fittings . . . . . . . 10.34
Circular Spindle Support Assembly for Granulation . . . . . . . . . . 10.36
Slicing Knife Holders and Insert Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.38
Slicing Knives, one piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.40
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies,
.038" thick knives, 1.4" diameter spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.42
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies with
Large Diameter Spacers, .038" thick knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.44
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies with
Feed Discs, .038" thick knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.46
Feed Spindle Assemblies, .038" thick feed discs . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.48
Feed Discs, .038" thick. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.50
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies,
.058" thick knives, 1.4" dia. spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.52
Circular Knife Spindles with
Large Diameter Spacers, .058" thick knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies with
Feed Discs, .058" thick knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.56
Feed Spindle Assemblies, .058" thick feed discs . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.58
Feed Discs, .058" thick. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.60
Stripper Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.62
Stripper Plate Spacers and Shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.64
Gate Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.66

(continued on the following page)

10.6 Section 10, Parts
Contents
Section 10 Parts (continued)
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 3/32-1/4" (2.4-6.4mm) . . . . . 10.68
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 9/32-9/16" (7.1-14.3mm). . . . 10.70
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 5/8-1" (15.9-25.4mm). . . . . . 10.72
Acetal Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 3/32-3/8" (2.4-9.5mm) . 10.74
Shred Spindle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.76
Spindle Assembly, Impeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.78
Spindle Assembly, Circular Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.80
Spindle Assembly, Crosscut Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.82
Idler Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.84
Lubrication Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.86
Motor and Motor Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.88
Drive Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.90
Electrical Assembly, VFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.92
Electrical Enclosure, VFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.94
Electrical Enclosure, VFD, Door Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.96
Electrical Schematic 80468 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.98
Electrical Schematic 80468, Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.99
Electrical Assembly, VFD, CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.100
Electrical Enclosure, VFD, CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.102
Electrical Enclosure, VFD, CE, Door Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.104
Electrical Schematic 80471 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.106
Electrical Schematic 80471, Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.107
Electrical Assembly, Soft Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.108
Electrical Enclosure, Soft Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.110
Electrical Enclosure, Soft Start, Door Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.112
Electrical Schematic 80474 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.114
Electrical Schematic 80474, Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.115
Guard Locking Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.116
Enclosure Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.118
Dimensional Drawing, Machine With Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.120
Dimensional Drawing, Machine Without Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.121

Ordering Parts
Customers in the U.S.A.: Include the
following information when ordering parts:
• Machine Model and Serial Number
• Part Quantity
• 5 Digit Part Number
• Part Description
The serial number of your machine is on
the name plate located on the support
housing above the motor. Do not use the
item numbers on the illustrations when
ordering parts.
Orders are accepted by mail, telephone,
facsimile and email.
Mail:
Urschel Laboratories, Inc.
1200 Cutting Edge Drive
Chesterton, Indiana 46304 USA
Telephone: 219-464-4811
Toll free: 844-877-2435
Facsimile: 219-462-3879
Email: orders@urschel.com
Customers outside the U.S.A.:
Contact your nearest Urschel
representative. Urschel has parts
inventories in several regions around the
world. Visit the website at www.urschel.com
for the address of the nearest
representative.
Returning Parts for Credit or Repair
Customers in the U.S.A., Canada and
Mexico: Customers must obtain a Return
Merchandise Authorization (RMA)
number before returning any parts. This
also applies to exchanges and repairs.
Please contact us at (219) 464-4811 or
(844) 877-2435. Items must be returned
Section 10, Parts 10.7
Ordering Information
within 30 days of purchase and be in their
original condition for credit. Pack parts
securely to avoid damage during
shipment. Ship parts to:
Urschel Laboratories, Inc.
1200 Cutting Edge Drive
Chesterton, Indiana 46304 USA
Customers outside the U.S.A.:
Contact your nearest Urschel
representative. Urschel has repair
facilities in several regions around the
world. Visit the website at www.urschel.com
for the address of the nearest
representative.
Motor Warranty and Repair
The motor has a one-year limited
warranty covering materials and
workmanship. If a motor fails within the
warranty period, contact the nearest
Urschel office. Your Urschel service
representative will work with the motor
manufacturer on warranty claims.
Unauthorized repair work may void the
warranty.
Stainless Motors, Inc. (SMI): If a motor
fails outside the warranty period, instruct
the service center to contact the
manufacturer prior to disassembling the
motor. The disassembly procedure for
stainless steel motors differs from
standard steel motors. Improper
disassembly may damage the motor
beyond repair. Contact the company at
http://www.stainlessmotors.com.
Baldor Electric Company, Inc.: If a
motor fails outside the warranty period,
contact Baldor for the location of an
authorized service center. Contact the
company at http://www.baldor.com.
10.8 Section 10, Parts
Tools
 Section 10, Parts 10.9
Tools
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 11010 - Wrench, combination, 9/16", chrome plated
2 1 98129 - Wrench, combination, 5/8" chrome plated
3 1 98130 - Wrench, combination, 1/2" chrome plated
4 1 98131 - Wrench, combination, 7/16", chrome plated
5 1 98132 - Wrench, combination, 3/4" chrome plated
6 1 98137 - Wrench, 13 piece set, chrome plated, ball end
7 1 11032 - Socket, 7/16", 6 point, 3/8" drive
8 1 11021 - Socket, 1/2", 12 point, 3/8" drive
9 1 11011 - Socket, 9/16", 12 point, 3/8" drive
10 1 11042 - Feeler Gauge
11 1 62297 - Wrench, "L" handle
12 1 11085 - Tamper Resistant Torx L-Key, T20
13 1 11086 - Tamper Resistant Torx L-Key, T25
14 1 11983 - Torque Wrench, "L" handle, 65 in-lbs., 3/8" drive
15 1 11984 - Hex Bit, 3/16", 3/8" drive
16 1 98328 - Wrench, 8 piece set, T-handle, long
17 1 11067 - Torque Wrench, "T" handle, 40 in-lbs.
18 1 11876 - Hex Bit, 3/16", 1/4" drive
19 1 11012 - Hex Bit, 5/16"
20 2 17453 - Protective Glove, medium, 1 glove only (fits hand size 8)
21 1 80332 - Wrench, combination, 1-5/16", s.s.
22 1 21659 - Release Tool with Handle (includes items 23–24)
23 1 21657 - Release Tool Key
24 1 11988 - Release Tool Bit Holder
25 1 42467 - Wrench, motor tension
26 1 11070 - Grease Gun
27 1 42468 - Bearing Seating Tool
28 1 80451 - Wrench, crosscut spindle
29 1 80431 - Handle For Insert Knife (includes item 30)
30 1 42568 - Pin, locking, 1/4"
31 1 11979 - Wrench, open end, 5/16", long
32 1 98096 - Belt Tension Tester
33 1 98163 - Screwdriver, flat head, 1/4" flat x 6"
34 1 80541 - Socket, #20, tamper resistant, 3/8" drive (to be used with 80540 tamper resistant nut)
35 1 80543 - Socket, #10, tamper resistant, 1/4" drive (to be used with 80542 tamper resistant screw)
36 2 34199 - Bracket, key and shackle, conveyor interlock
37 1 34211 - Chain, guard lock switch
38 2 34212 - Shackle, guard lock switch (includes hardware)
– 1 11071 - Tool Box (not shown)
– 1 98280 - Grease, 0, Urschelube FDA, cartridge (not shown)
10.10 Section 10, Parts
Optional Tools
 Section 10, Parts 10.11
Optional Tools
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Optional Tools
– 1 42425 - Torque Wrench With 5/16" Open End Head Drive (includes items 1–2,
200 inch pounds, used to tighten fastening posts)
1 1 11830 - Torque Wrench
2 1 42424 - Head Drive, open end, 5/16"
3 1 80410 - Crosscut Setting Tool (for adjusting the crosscut bearing spindle)
4 1 98264 - Shim Reference Tool, small (includes item 5; for rebuilding the circular and
crosscut bearing spindles)
5 3 10508 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 3/4", steel
6 1 98265 - Shim Reference Tool, large (includes item 7; for rebuilding the
impeller bearing spindle)
7 3 10509 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/4", steel
– 2 17567 - Protective Glove, X-small, 1 glove only (fits hand size 6)
– 2 17497 - Protective Glove, small, 1 glove only (fits hand size 7)
– 2 17498 - Protective Glove, large, 1 glove only (fits hand size 9)
– 2 17566 - Protective Glove, X-large, 1 glove only (fits hand size 10)
– 1 22447 - Bearing Pusher
– 1 11004 - Buffing Wheel, 10" diameter
– 1 11005 - Buffing Compound, 3 lb. bar
10.12 Section 10, Parts
Floor Stands, Covers and Guards
 Section 10, Parts 10.13
Floor Stands, Covers and Guards
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 80428 - Floor Stand, non caster, Sprint 2
1 80426 - Floor Stand, casters, Sprint 2
– 1 12384 - Caster Assembly, plate, set of 4 with fasteners (includes items 2–5)
2 2 12477 - Caster, swivel, plate type
3 2 12528 - Caster, rigid, plate type
4 16 10058 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1", s.s.
5 16 10249 - Hex Nut, 3/8-16, s.s., locking, thick
6 1 80455 - Support Housing
7 3 10085 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 3/4-10 x 2", s.s.
8 3 10399 - Hex Nut, 3/4-10, locking
9 1 80454 - Feed Hopper Extension
10 4 10039 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1", s.s.
11 4 19603 - Spacer, 7/16"
12 4 10230 - Hex Nut, 1/4-20, s.s., locking, thick
13 1 80529 - Feed Cover/Discharge, extend/extension (includes items 14–19)
14 1 80009 - Hinge, feed cover
15 3 10402 - Flat Head Socket Cap Screw, 5/16-18 x 3/4", s.s.
16 2 42257 - Washer, flat, .625" I.D. x 1.00" O.D. x .100"
17 1 80010 - Hinge, feed cover
18 3 10429 - Flat Head Socket Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1", s.s.
19 3 10374 - Hex Cap Nut, 3/8-16, s.s., Nylok
20 1 80530 - Discharge Extension
21 4 80542 - Screw, 1/4-20 x 1" long, s.s., tamper resistant
22 4 19603 - Spacer, 7/16"
23 4 80540 - Nut, 1/4-20, s.s., tamper resistant
24 1 80224 - Draw Latch Assembly
25 2 10037 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", s.s.
26 2 10365 - Hex Nut, 1/4-20, s.s., locking, thin
27 1 55118 - Strike Latch
28 2 10089 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", s.s.
29 1 80509 - Baffle, inner/extended
30 2 10251 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", Nylok
31 3 10007 - Washer, flat, 1/4", s.s., thin
32 1 10037 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", s.s.
33 1 80449 - Back Cover, hinged
34 2 * - Washer, flat
35 1 42238 - Handle, knob
36 1 42239 - Handle, latch

* Contact an Urschel representative.

10.14 Section 10, Parts
Safety Signs and Machine Labels, feed cover with extension
 Section 10, Parts 10.15
Safety Signs and Machine Labels, feed cover with extension
Part Number
Language
Language* Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6** Item 7
Code*
Feed Opening Discharge Chute Removed Guard Caution Label External/Internal Danger Label Warning Label,
Disconnect Current Release Tool
English/Spanish – 11662 11663 11665 11666 21361 12821 98141
Arabic AR 98113 98115 98117 98125 21570 21594 21651
Chinese CH 11724 11725 11727 11723 21360 98030 21564
Croatian CR 98112 98114 98116 98126 98185 – 98186
Czech CZ 11868 11869 11871 11872 11999 98023 98148
Danish DA 11793 11794 11796 11797 98074 12830 21652
Dutch DU 11716 11717 11719 11720 21367 12824 98181
Estonian ES 98166 98165 98168 98167 – – –
Finnish FI 11758 11759 11761 11762 21422 12829 98223
French F 11674 11675 11677 11678 21362 12822 21565
German GE 11681 11682 11684 11685 21363 12823 98142
Greek GR 11737 11738 11740 11741 21394 12828 21567
Hungarian HU 11772 11773 11775 11776 98261 98263 98262
Indonesian IN 11751 11752 11754 11755 21358 98226 21653
Italian IT 11702 11703 11705 11706 21365 12826 98149
Japanese J 11688 11689 11691 11692 21364 98240 98179
Korean KO 98228 98229 98230 98231 98232 98235 98233
Polish POL 11730 11731 11733 11734 21395 21228 98150
Portuguese PO 11695 11696 11698 11699 21388 12827 98175
Russian RU 11744 11745 11747 11748 21387 21467 21654
Serbian SB 11109 11110 11112 11108 98108 21382 98109
Swedish SW 11709 11710 11712 11713 21366 12825 21411
Thai TH 11946 11947 11949 11950 98013 98227 98224
Turkish TU 11765 11766 11768 11769 21464 98097 23892
Quantity 4 4 2 1 1 1 2
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
8 *** 12714 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 200 volts
12715 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 208 volts
12716 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 220 volts
12717 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 230 volts
12718 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 240 volts
12719 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 380 volts
12720 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 400 volts
12721 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 415 volts
12723 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 460 volts
12724 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 575 volts
9 *** 21641 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 380Y/220
21642 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 400Y/230
21643 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 415Y/240
21640 - Hazard Alert Label, electrical, 460Y/266
10 3 98140 - Label, guard locking switch
11 1 11326 - Urschel Label, 1.5" x 8.25"
12 1 53360 - Label, manual release tool (located inside electrical enclosure)
13 1 80421 - Label, Sprint 2
14 1 80494 - Label, belt rotation
15 1 98319 - Danger Label, do not step

* The English/Spanish label has English in the top language area. All other labels are bilingual with English in
the bottom language area. These labels also have a language code.
** Used only on CE compliant enclosure with variable frequency drive, located inside the electrical enclosure.
*** One Hazard Alert Label of corresponding voltage is supplied with the machine.
10.16 Section 10, Parts
Slice Gate and Related Parts
 Section 10, Parts 10.17
Slice Gate and Related Parts
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 80447 - Case, crinkle (includes items 2–3)
1 80446 - Case, straight (not shown, includes items 2–3)
2 2 22081 - Dowel Pin, 3/8" x 31/32"
3 2 42772 - Dowel Pin, 1/4", threaded
4 6 10060 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1-1/2", s.s.
5 6 10015 - Lock Washer, 3/8", s.s.
6 1 80433 - Slice Gate, straight
1 80434 - Slice Gate, crinkle (not shown)
7 1 80452 - Guard, slice gate, secondary
8 2 10248 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", Nylok
9 1 80521 - Guard, slice gate, extended
10 2 10281 - Flat Head Socket Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8", s.s.
11 1 80008 - Hinge Plate
12 6 10307 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 5/16-18 x 1/2", Nylok
13 6 38064 - Washer, flat, 5/16", s.s.
14 1 80477 - Chip Guard, left, extended (includes item 15)
15 1 43133 - Bushing, chip guard
16 1 10226 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1", Nylok
17 1 10270 - Washer, flat, 3/8", s.s., thick
18 1 80478 - Chip Guard, right, extended (includes item 19)
19 1 43133 - Bushing, chip guard
20 1 80498 - Chip Guard, right, extended, metric (includes item 21)
21 1 43133 - Bushing, chip guard
22 4 10402 - Flat Head Socket Cap Screw, 5/16-18 x 3/4", s.s.
23 1 42640 - Drive Coupling, 2.3" O.D. (includes item 24)
24 2 37040 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 5/8", 416, s.s.
25 3 10593 - Lockwasher, 1/4", vibration resistant
26 3 10592 - Button Head Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8"
27 1 80456 - Bar, chip guard
28 1 43135 - Knob, slice gate adjustment
29 2 43247 - Washer, bronze, .65" I.D. x 1.00" O.D. x .06"
30 1 43136 - Adjustment Shaft, slice gate (includes item 31)
31 1 10137 - Socket Set Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", cup point, s.s.
32 1 43137 - Knob, locking, slice gate
33 1 80476 - Bar, slice gate

Alternate parts
34 1 43228 - Handle, short (replaces 1 of item 12 and 13; part numbers 10307 and 38064)
35 2 43229 - Handle, long (replaces 2 of items 12 and 13; part numbers 10307 and 38064)

See Section 6: Machine Setup for information on the use of crinkle and straight slice cases and gates.
10.18 Section 10, Parts
Dicing
 Section 10, Parts 10.19
Dicing
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Dicing only
1 1 * - Slicing Knife Holder
2 1 * - Knife, slicing, replaceable
3 2 42672 - Fastening Post
4 1 * - Stripper Plate
5 3 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
6 1 * - Stripper Plate Spacer
7 3 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
8 1 * - Gate Extension
9 2 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
10 1 * - Circular Knife Spindle and Circular Support Assembly
11 2 10249 - Hex Nut, 3/8-16, s.s., locking, thick
12 1 80187 - Extension, crosscut spindle
13 4 10226 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1", Nylok
14 1 * - Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly
15 1 80190 - Cup, braze assembly

Alternate parts
16 1 * - Knife, slicing (replaces items 1 and 2)
17 2 43206 - Fastening Post (replaces item 3)

* Cutting parts begin on page 10.38. Cutting parts are listed in the order that product flows through the
machine: slicing knives, circular knife and feed spindle assemblies, stripper plates, and crosscut knife and
shred spindle assemblies.
10.20 Section 10, Parts
Strip Cutting with the Circular Knife Spindle Assembly
 Section 10, Parts 10.21
Strip Cutting with the Circular Knife Spindle Assembly
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Strip cutting with the circular knife spindle
1 1 * - Slicing Knife Holder
2 1 * - Knife, slicing, replaceable
3 2 42672 - Fastening Post
4 1 * - Stripper Plate
5 3 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
6 1 * - Stripper Plate Spacer
7 3 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
8 1 * - Gate Extension
9 2 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
10 1 * - Circular Knife Spindle and Circular Support Assembly
11 2 10249 - Hex Nut, 3/8-16, s.s., locking, thick

Alternate parts
12 1 * - Knife, slicing (replaces items 1 and 2)
13 2 43206 - Fastening Post (replaces item 3)

* Cutting parts begin on page 10.38. Cutting parts are listed in the order that product flows through the
machine: slicing knives, circular knife and feed spindle assemblies, stripper plates, and crosscut knife and
shred spindle assemblies.
10.22 Section 10, Parts
Strip Cutting with the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly
 Section 10, Parts 10.23
Strip Cutting with the Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Strip cutting with the crosscut knife spindle
1 1 * - Slicing Knife Holder
2 1 * - Knife, slicing, replaceable
3 2 42672 - Fastening Post
4 1 * - Stripper Plate
5 3 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
6 1 * - Stripper Plate Spacer
7 3 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
8 1 * - Gate Extension
9 2 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
10 1 * - Feed Spindle and Circular Support Assembly
11 2 10249 - Hex Nut, 3/8-16, s.s., locking, thick
12 1 80187 - Extension, crosscut spindle
13 4 10226 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1", Nylok
14 1 * - Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly
15 1 80190 - Cup, braze assembly

Alternate parts
16 1 * - Knife, slicing (replaces items 1 and 2)
17 2 43206 - Fastening Post (replaces item 3)

* Cutting parts begin on page 10.38. Cutting parts are listed in the order that product flows through the
machine: slicing knives, circular knife and feed spindle assemblies, stripper plates, and crosscut knife and
shred spindle assemblies.
10.24 Section 10, Parts
Slicing
 Section 10, Parts 10.25
Slicing
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Slicing only
1 1 * - Slicing Knife Holder
2 1 * - Knife, slicing, replaceable
3 1 80507 - Inner Guide, slice only
4 2 10110 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 3/4", s.s.
2 10326 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1/2", s.s. (for the slicing knife holder when used
without the Inner Guide, item 3)

Alternate parts
5 1 * - Knife, slicing (replaces items 1 and 2)

* Cutting parts begin on page 10.38. Cutting parts are listed in the order that product flows through the
machine: slicing knives, circular knife and feed spindle assemblies, stripper plates, and crosscut knife and
shred spindle assemblies.
10.26 Section 10, Parts
Shredding
 Section 10, Parts 10.27
Shredding
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Typical setup for shredding meat; other setups may be required for best results.
1 1 * - Knife, slicing
2 2 42672 - Fastening Post
3 1 * - Stripper Plate
4 3 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
5 1 * - Stripper Plate Spacer
6 3 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
7 1 * - Gate Extension
8 2 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
9 1 * - Feed Spindle and Circular Support Assembly
10 2 10249 - Hex Nut, 3/8-16, s.s., locking, thick
11 1 80187 - Extension, crosscut spindle
12 4 10226 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1", Nylok
13 1 * - Shred Spindle Assembly
14 1 80190 - Cup, braze assembly

Alternate parts
15 2 43206 - Fastening Post (replaces item 2)

* Cutting parts begin on page 10.38. Cutting parts are listed in the order that product flows through the
machine: slicing knives, circular knife and feed spindle assemblies, stripper plates, and crosscut knife and
shred spindle assemblies.
10.28 Section 10, Parts
Water Spray System for the Cutting Unit
 Section 10, Parts 10.29
Water Spray System for the Cutting Unit
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 2 10248 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", Nylok
2 1 80499 - Water Spray System Assembly (includes items 3–11)
3 1 53545 - Valve, ball
4 4 53547 - Pipe Nipple, 1/4" x 1-1/2" long, s.s.
5 4 53549 - Fitting, 90 degree, elbow, s.s.
6 1 42480 - Pipe Nipple, 1/4" x 3" long, s.s.
7 1 53548 - Fitting, tee, s.s.
8 1 80500 - Guard, slice gate secondary, with spray
9 4 42497 - Washer, teflon, .50" I.D. x .75" O.D. x .031"
10 2 53550 - Nozzle, 80 degree, flat spray, s.s.
11 1 80024 - Guard, slice gate (replaces 80521 extended slice gate guard)

NOTICE
The water spray assembly can be added to a machine that was not originally so equipped. The assembly can
also be used with air for dry products. The water spray system comes fully assembled and ready for installation.
10.30 Section 10, Parts
Impellers
 Section 10, Parts 10.31
Impellers

80312 - Impeller, 3 paddle, 9.315" opening 80015 - Impeller, 4 paddle, 9.315" opening

80011 - Impeller, 7 paddle, 9.315" opening

Item Quantity Part Number and Description

1 1 80312 - Impeller, 3 paddle, 9.315" opening
1 80015 - Impeller, 4 paddle, 9.315" opening (shown)
1 80011 - Impeller, 7 paddle, 9.315" opening
2 3 10057 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 3/4", s.s.
10.32 Section 10, Parts
Circular Spindle Support Assembly
 Section 10, Parts 10.33
Circular Spindle Support Assembly
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 * - Circular Knife Spindle Assembly
2 1 * - Circular Knife Spindle Assembly with Feed Discs
3 1 * - Circular Knife Spindle Assembly, feed
4 1 80063 - Circular Support Assembly (includes items 5–16)
5 1 80064 - Circular Support Assembly Detail, top
6 1 42286 - Circular Support Assembly Detail, side (includes item 7)
7 2 42304 - Dowel Pin, 5/16" x 1", 416 s.s.
8 4 10059 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4", s.s.
9 4 10015 - Lock Washer, 3/8", s.s.
10 1 42285 - Circular Support Assembly Detail, side (includes item 11)
11 2 42304 - Dowel Pin, 5/16" x 1", 416 s.s.
12 2 42261 - Ball Bearing, s.s.
13 2 80315 - Slice Guide, straight
14 4 10086 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 5/8"
15 1 80026 - Baffle, circular
16 3 10251 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", Nylok

Alternate parts
17 2 80366 - Slice Guide, Tall (replaces item 13; do not use with crinkle knives)

* Cutting parts begin on page 10.38. Cutting parts are listed in the order that product flows through the
machine: slicing knives, circular knife and feed spindle assemblies, stripper plates, and crosscut knife and
shred spindle assemblies.
10.34 Section 10, Parts
Circular Spindle Support Assembly with Grease Fittings
 Section 10, Parts 10.35
Circular Spindle Support Assembly with Grease Fittings
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 * - Circular Knife Spindle Assembly
2 1 * - Circular Knife Spindle Assembly with Feed Discs
3 1 * - Circular Knife Spindle Assembly, feed
4 1 80326 - Circular Support Assembly, grease (includes items 5–18)
5 1 80064 - Circular Support Assembly Detail, top
6 1 42904 - Circular Support Assembly Detail, left (includes items 7–8)
7 2 42304 - Dowel Pin, 5/16" x 1", 416 s.s.
8 1 11401 - Grease Fitting, 1/8", straight, s.s.
9 4 10059 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4", s.s.
10 4 10015 - Lock Washer, 3/8", s.s.
11 1 42905 - Circular Support Assembly Detail, right (includes item 12–13)
12 2 42304 - Dowel Pin, 5/16" x 1", 416 s.s.
13 1 11401 - Grease Fitting, 1/8", straight, s.s.
14 2 42906 - Ball Bearing, s.s., grease
15 2 80315 - Slice Guide, straight
16 4 10086 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 5/8"
17 1 80026 - Baffle, circular
18 3 10251 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", Nylok

Alternate parts
19 2 80366 - Slice Guide, tall (replaces item 15; do not use with crinkle knives)
20 2 80316 - Slice Guide, crinkle (replaces item 15)

* Cutting parts begin on page 10.38. Cutting parts are listed in the order that product flows through the
machine: slicing knives, circular knife and feed spindle assemblies, stripper plates, and crosscut knife and
shred spindle assemblies.
10.36 Section 10
Circular Spindle Support Assembly for Granulation
 Section 10 10.37
Circular Spindle Support Assembly for Granulation
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 * - Circular Knife Spindle Assembly
2 1 80368 - Circular Support Assembly, granulation (includes items 3–16)
3 1 80367 - Circular Support Assembly, top, granulation
4 1 42286 - Circular Support Assembly Detail, side (includes item 5)
5 2 42304 - Dowel Pin, 5/16" x 1", 416 s.s.
6 4 10059 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4", s.s.
7 4 10015 - Lock Washer, 3/8", s.s.
8 1 42285 - Circular Support Assembly Detail, side (includes item 9)
9 2 42304 - Dowel Pin, 5/16" x 1", 416 s.s.
10 2 42261 - Ball Bearing, s.s.
11 2 80366 - Slice Guide, tall (do not use with heavy duty slicing knives or holders)
12 4 10086 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 5/8"
13 1 80026 - Baffle, circular
14 3 10251 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", Nylok
15 1 80365 - Cover, circular support assembly
16 2 10251 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", Nylok

* Cutting parts begin on page 10.38. Cutting parts are listed in the order that product flows through the
machine: slicing knives, circular knife and feed spindle assemblies, stripper plates, and crosscut knife and
shred spindle assemblies.
10.38 Section 10, Parts
Slicing Knife Holders and Insert Knives

Insert Knives
80445 - Knife, slicing, straight, replaceable insert
(use with knife holder for straight knife)
80450 - Knife, slicing, scalloped, replaceable insert (use with knife
.076" (1.9mm) holder for straight knife)
80448 - Knife, slicing, crinkle, replaceable insert (.076" crinkle depth;
use with knife holder for crinkle knife)

Chart 1 - Knife Holder Feature, Abbreviation and Description Restrictions

STD - Standard Do not use with .058" thick circular
2 The standard knife holder (straight and crinkle) is .312" thick (1), knives and feed discs. Straight and
slots (2) are .070" wide and clearance from the shear edge (3) to the crinkle insert knives require different
crosscut knives is .015-.020" (.38-.51 mm). In Chart 2, knife holder knife holders; do not use crinkle
1 features are standard unless otherwise indicated. For example, a holder crosscut knives with a straight slicing
knife holder.
3 listed as WS125 (Wide Slot, .125") is standard thickness and crosscut
clearance.
WS - Wide Slot Not recommended for soft products that
4 Slots (4) are wider than .070"; slot width in decimal inches follows the have incomplete cuts due to product
abbreviation in Chart 2, for example WS125 indicates a slot width of deforming into the slots.
.125".

RC - Reduced Clearance Use with crosscut knife spindles with

6 Used to reduce the clearance between the crosscut knives (5) and the narrow knives (sizes 3/32–1/4") and
5 shear edge (6) of the slicing knife to .006-.010" (.15-.25 mm); standard heavy duty crosscut spindles only.
clearance is .015-.020" (.38-.51 mm).

No Slots Cannot be used with circular knives.

For slice only or use with crosscut knife spindle; straight cut has grooves
(shown), crinkle knife is smooth; can be used with a feed spindle.
 Section 10, Parts 10.39
Slicing Knife Holders and Insert Knives

Chart 2 Slicing Knife Holders with slots Example:

Part Number is followed by the slot spacing in inches and the following abbreviations. Part Slot Spacing Feature
Circular knife STD = Standard WS = Wide Slot, slot width, decimal inch RC = Reduced Clearance
Number (inch) Abbreviation
(see previous page)
or feed disc
spacing The knife holder thickness, slot width and clearance from the shear edge to the crosscut knives are standard unless 80086-1/8 (STD)
otherwise indicated (see the description of “Standard” on the previous page).
inch mm
Straight Cut Crinkle Cut .076"
1/8 3.2 80086-1/8 (STD) 80261-1/8 (RC) ––
5/32 4.0 80156-5/32 (STD) 80262-5/32 (RC) ––
3/16 4.8 80087-3/16 (STD) 80263-3/16 (RC) ––
7/32 5.6 80516-7/32 (STD) ––
80086-1/8 (STD) 80264-1/4 (RC) 80088-1/4 (STD) 80303-1/4 (WS125)
1/4 6.4 80195-1/4 (STD)
80261-1/8 (RC)
.300 7.6 –– 80354-.300 (STD)
5/16 7.9 80156-5/32 (STD) 80262-5/32(RC) 80157-5/16 (STD) 80265-5/16 (RC) ––
80086-1/8 (STD) 80261-1/8 (RC) 80087-3/16 (STD) 80263-3/16 (RC)
3/8 9.5 80196-3/8 (STD)
80089-3/8 (STD) 80360-3/8 (WS125) 80266-3/8 (RC)
7/16 11.1 80158-7/16 (STD) 80267-7/16 (RC) ––
80086-1/8 (STD) 80261-1/8 (RC) 80088-1/4 (STD) 80303-1/4 (WS125)
1/2 12.7 80195-1/4 (STD)
80264-1/4 (RC) 80090-1/2 (STD) 80268-1/2 (RC)
9/16 14.3 80228-9/16 (STD) 80273-9/16 (RC) ––
5/8 15.9 80157-5/16 (STD) 80265-5/16 (RC) 80091-5/8 (STD) 80269-5/8 (RC) ––

80086-1/8 (STD) 80261-1/8 (RC) 80087-3/16 (STD) 80263-3/16 (RC)

3/4 19.1 80088-1/4 (STD) 80264-1/4 (RC) 80303-1/4 (WS125) 80089-3/8 (STD) 80195-1/4 (STD)
80266-3/8 (RC) 80630-3/8 (WS125)

7/8 22.2 80158-7/16 (STD) 80267-7/16 (RC) 80093-7/8(STD) 80271-7/8 (RC) ––

80086-1/8 (STD) 80088-1/4 (STD) 80264-1/4 (RC) 80303-1/4 (WS125)
1 25.4 80195-1/4 (STD)
80090-1/2 (STD) 80268-1/2 (RC)

Chart 3
Slicing Knife Holders, No Slots (no circular knives)
Type of Slice Knife Insert Knife
Holder
Part Number Part Number
80445
Straight 80232
80450
Crinkle, .076" 80197 80448

Chart 4 Chart 5
Slicing Knife Holders, Crinkle Slice with Straight Crosscut Slicing Knife Holders, Granulation
Circular knife or Knife Insert Knife Circular knife or Knife Insert Knife
feed disc spacing Holder feed disc spacing Holder
Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number
inch mm inch mm
1/8 3.2 80252 80448 80445
1/8 3.2 80364
80450
3/16 4.8 80253 80448
80445
.300 7.6 80387 80448 3/16 4.8 80363
80450
10.40 Section 10, Parts
Slicing Knives, one piece

Chart 1 - Knife Feature, Abbreviation and Description Restrictions

STD - Standard Do not use with .058" thick circular knives
2 The standard knife (straight and crinkle) is .312" thick (1), slots (2) and feed discs (use with .038" thick parts).
are .070" wide and clearance from the shear edge (3) to the Do not use crinkle crosscut knives with a
crosscut knives is .015-.020" (.38-.51 mm). In Chart 2, knife features straight slicing knife.
3 are standard unless otherwise indicated. For example, a knife listed
1 as WS125 (Wide Slot, .125") is standard thickness and clearance.

WS - Wide Slot Use with .058" thick circular knives and

Slots (4) are wider than .070"; slot width in decimal inches follows feed discs, and with products that cause
the abbreviation in Chart 2, for example WS125 indicates a slot knife deflection.
width of .125".
4
RC - Reduced Clearance Use with crosscut knife spindles with
6 Used to reduce the clearance between the crosscut knives (5) and narrow knives (sizes 3/32–1/4") and heavy
duty crosscut spindles only.
5 the shear edge (6) of the slicing knife to .006-.010" (.15-.25 mm);
standard clearance is .015-.020" (.38-.51 mm).

7 HD - Heavy Duty Slices will be .050-.060" (1.27-1.52 mm)

The knife edge (7) is thicker and knife bevel more blunt than the thinner than the slice setting indicates. Do
standard knife. not use 80366 tall slice guide (slice guide
mounts to the circular support sides).

THK - Thick Slices will be .050-.060" (1.27-1.52 mm)

This knife is .372" (9.45 mm) thick (8); standard knife is .312" thinner than the slice setting indicates. Do
(7.92 mm) thick. not use 80366 tall slice guide (slice guide
mounts to the circular support sides).
8
No Slots Cannot be used with circular knives.
For slice only or use with crosscut knife spindle; straight cut has
grooves (shown), crinkle knife is smooth; can be used with a feed
spindle.
 Section 10, Parts 10.41
Slicing Knives, one piece

Chart 2 One piece Slicing Knives with slots Example:

Part Number is followed by the slot spacing in inches and the following abbreviations. Part Slot Spacing Feature
Number (inch) Abbreviation
STD = Standard WS = Wide Slot, slot width, decimal inch RC = Reduced Clearance
Circular HD = Heavy Duty THK = Thick
(see previous page)
knife or
feed disc The knife thickness, slot width and clearance from the shear edge to the crosscut knives are standard unless otherwise 80383-1/4 (HD,THK,RC)
spacing indicated (see the description of “Standard” on the previous page).

Straight Cut Crinkle Cut .076"

inch mm
1/8 3.2 80077-1/8 (STD) 80320-1/8 (HD) –
5/32 4.0 80152-5/32 (STD) 80380-5/32 (HD) –
3/16 4.8 80153-3/16 (STD) 80381-3/16 (HD) 80251-3/16 (HD,THK,RC) –
80077-1/8 (STD) 80320-1/8 (HD) 80078-1/4 (STD)
1/4 6.4 80209-1/4 (STD)
80383-1/4 (HD,THK,RC) 80323-1/4 (HD,WS125)
5/16 7.9 80380-5/32 (HD) 80154-5/16 (STD) 80321-5/16 (HD,WS125) –
80077-1/8 (STD) 80320-1/8 (HD) 80153-3/16 (STD)
3/8 9.5 80381-3/16 (HD) 80251-3/16 (HD,THK,RC) 80270-3/8 (HD,THK,RC) 80210-3/8 (STD)
80079-3/8 (STD) 80327-3/8 (HD, WS125)
7/16 11.1 80155-7/16 (STD)
80077-1/8 (STD) 80320-1/8 (HD) 80078-1/4 (STD)
1/2 12.7 80209-1/4 (STD)
80383-1/4 (HD,THK,RC) 80080-1/2 (STD)
9/16 14.3 80227-9/16 (STD)
80077-1/8 (STD) 80320-1/8 (HD) 80154-5/16 (STD)
5/8 15.9 –
80321-5/16 (HD,WS125) 80081-5/8 (STD)
80078-1/4 (STD) 80383-1/4 (HD,THK,RC) 80079-3/8 (STD) 80209-1/4 (STD)
3/4 19.1
80270-3/8 (HD,THK,RC) 80082-3/4 (STD)
7/8 22.2 80083-7/8 (STD) 80155-7/16 (STD) –
80077-1/8 (STD) 80320-1/8 (HD) 80078-1/4 (STD)
1 25.4 80209-1/4 (STD)
80383-1/4 (HD,THK,RC) 80080-1/2 (STD) 80084-1 (STD)

Chart 3
One Piece Slicing Knives, No Slots
(no circular knives)
Knife
Type of Slice
Part Number
Straight 80362

Crinkle 80208
10.42 Section 10, Parts
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies, .038" thick knives, 1.4" diameter spacers
 Section 10, Parts 10.43
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies, .038" thick knives, 1.4" diameter spacers
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 see Chart 1 - Spindle Assembly, circular (includes items 2–7)
2 1 80065 - Shaft, circular knife
3 2 42489 - O-ring, 1/16" x 7/8" x 1", Viton
4 see Chart 42265 - Knife, circular, 3.5", serrated, double bevel, .038" thick
5 see Chart see Chart 1 - Spacer, 1.4" O.D., .038" thick knife
6 1 see Chart 1 - Spacer, 1.4" O.D., .038" thick knife (some assemblies require a final spacer;
see Chart 1)
7 1 80145 - Nut, circular

Alternate parts
8 42490 - Knife, circular, 3.5", double bevel, .038" thick (plain edge, no serrations)
9 42555 - Knife, circular, 3.5", serrated, double bevel, heavy duty, .038" (thicker at the knife edge
than the standard knife; see dimension “D” on the opposite page)
10 43101 - Knife, circular, 3.5", serrated, single bevel, heavy duty, .038" (for compressible
products such as greens)
11 42649 - Spacer, filler, .038" thick, 1.40" O.D. (use in place of knives to change the size of cut)

Chart 1
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies, .038" thick knives
Size of Cut Circular Knife Item 4 Item 5 Item 6
Spindle 42265 Knife, Spacer Final
Assembly .038" thick Part Quantity Dia. Spacer
inch mm Part Number Quantity Number (inch) Quantity: 1

1/8 3.2 80132 55 42319 54 1.40 –

5/32 4.0 80133 44 42402 42 1.40 42320
3/16 4.8 80134 37 42320 36 1.40 –
7/32 5.6 80520 32 43230 30 1.40 42320
1/4 6.4 80135 28 42321 27 1.40 –
5/16 7.9 80136 22 42322 20 1.40 42324
11/32 8.7 80424 20 42802 18 1.40 42821
3/8 9.5 80137 19 42323 18 1.40 –
7/16 11.1 80138 16 42633 14 1.40 42325
1/2 12.7 80139 15 42324 13 1.40 42321
9/16 14.3 80140 13 42821 12 1.40 –
5/8 15.9 80141 12 42325 10 1.40 42324
3/4 19.1 80142 10 42326 9 1.40 –
7/8 22.2 80143 9 42482 7 1.40 42325
1 25.4 80144 8 42327 6 1.40 42326
10.44 Section 10, Parts
Circular Knife Spindles with Large Diameter Spacers, .038" thick knives

Item Quantity Part Number and Description

1 1 see Charts - Spindle Assembly, circular (includes items 2–7)
2 1 80065 - Shaft, circular knife
3 2 42489 - O-ring, 1/16" x 7/8" x 1", Viton
4 see Charts 42265 - Knife, circular, 3.5", serrated, double bevel, .038" thick
5 see Charts see Charts - Spacer, large diameter, .038" thick knife
6 1 see Charts - Spacer, large diameter, .038" thick knife (some assemblies require a final spacer;
see Chart 1)
7 1 80145 - Nut, circular

See Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies, .038" thick knives, 1.4" diameter spacers for alternate parts.

Alternate parts
8 43235 - Spacer, filler, .038" thick, 1.80" O.D. (use in place of knives to change the size of cut)
9 43236 - Spacer, filler, .038" thick, 2.08" O.D. (use in place of knives to change the size of cut)
 Section 10, Parts 10.45
Circular Knife Spindles with Large Diameter Spacers, .038" thick knives
Ordering a spindle with Alternate Parts
Spindles with large diameter spacers do not have assembly numbers. Follow these steps when ordering:
1. See the column titled “Reference Spindle Assembly” in Chart 1, and select the appropriate knife and/or feed
disc spacing. The Reference Spindle Assembly contains all knives (42265) and 1.40" diameter spacers.
2. Choose corresponding large diameter spacers.
3. Substitute large diameter spacers into the reference assembly.

Restrictions for Large Diameter Spacers

Slice Opening: the slice opening is restricted, see Chart 2
Stripper Plates: do not use stripper plate shims; do not use secondary stripper plates.
Feed Discs: the points on discs with small diameters will not protrude beyond the stripper plate.

Chart 1 Chart 2
Reference Assemblies and large diameter spacers, Maximum slice setting with standard
.038" thick knives stripper plate* and large diameter circular
knife spacers
Space between Reference Item 4 Items 5 and 6
Circular Knife Stripper Maximum
Knives or Feed Spindle Knife, Large Diameter Spacers Spacer Plate Slice Opening (M)
Discs Assembly .038" thick Part No. Diameter Quantity Diameter (D) Spacer (S) inch mm
inch mm Part Number Quantity Part Number

1/8 3.2 80132 55 42603 2.08 54

42604 2.08 42
5/32 4.0 80133 44
42605 2.08 1
3/16 4.8 80134 37 42605 2.08 36
1/4 6.4 80135 28 42606 2.08 27
42665 1.80 20
5/16 7.9 80136 22
42609 1.80 1
3/8 9.5 80137 19 42608 1.80 18
80198 3/8 9.5
1.80" 80199 3/8 9.5
80200 1/2 12.7
80198 1/4 6.4
2.08" 80199 5/16 7.9
80200 3/8 9.5
* See Stripper Plates and Stripper Plate
Spacers and Shims.
10.46 Section 10, Parts
Circular Knife Spindles with Feed Discs, .038" thick knives

Item Quantity Part Number and Description

1 1 see Chart - Spindle Assembly, circular, with feed discs (includes items 2–7)
2 1 80065 - Shaft, circular knife
3 2 42489 - O-ring, 1/16" x 7/8" x 1", Viton
4 see Chart 42265 - Knife, circular, 3.5", serrated, double bevel, .038" thick
5 see Chart see Chart - Feed Disc, .038" thick (see “Feed Discs, .038" thick” on the following pages)
6 see Chart see Chart - Spacer, 1.4" O.D., .038" thick knife
7 1 see Chart - Spacer, 1.4" O.D., .038" thick knife (some assemblies require a final spacer;
see Chart 1)
8 1 80145 - Nut, circular

See Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies, .038" thick knives, 1.4" diameter spacers for alternate parts.
 Section 10, Parts 10.47
Circular Knife Spindles with Feed Discs, .038" thick knives

Ordering a spindle with Alternate Parts

Spindles with knife and feed disc combinations do not have assembly numbers.
To order a spindle with a customized set of knives, feed discs and spacers, follow these steps when ordering:
1. See the column titled “Reference Spindle Assembly” in Chart 1, and select the appropriate knife and feed disc
spacing. The Reference Spindle Assembly contains all knives (42265) and 1.40" diameter spacers.
2. Choose knives, feed discs and spacers from the previous and following pages.
3. Substitute parts into the reference assembly.

Restrictions apply to some parts; see the instructions on the corresponding pages.

Chart 1
Reference Assemblies for Spindles with
Knives and Feed Discs, .038" thick
Space Between Reference Item 4 Knife and Item 6 Spacer* and
Feed Discs Spindle Item 5 Feed Disc, Item 7 Final Spacer*
Assembly .038" thick (final spacer required
on some spindles)
inch mm Part Number Total Quantity Quantity Final Spacer

1/8 3.2 80132 55 54 –

5/32 4.0 80133 44 42 1
3/16 4.8 80134 37 36 –
7/32 5.6 80520 32 30 1
1/4 6.4 80135 28 27 –
5/16 7.9 80136 22 20 1
11/32 8.7 80424 20 18 1
3/8 9.5 80137 19 18 –
7/16 11.1 80138 16 14 1
1/2 12.7 80139 15 13 1
9/16 14.3 80140 13 12 –
5/8 15.9 80141 12 10 1
3/4 19.1 80142 10 9 –
7/8 22.2 80143 9 7 1
1 25.4 80144 8 6 1
* 1.40" diameter spacers are standard on the reference spindle assembly.
Spindles can also be assembled with 1.80" and 2.08" diameter spacers.
10.48 Section 10, Parts
Feed Spindle Assemblies, .038" thick feed discs

Item Quantity Part Number and Description

1 1 see Charts - Spindle Assembly, feed (includes items 2–7)
2 1 80065 - Shaft, circular knife
3 2 42489 - O-ring, 1/16" x 7/8" x 1", Viton
4 see Charts see Charts - Feed Disc, .038" thick (see “Feed Discs, .038" thick” on the following pages)
5 see Charts see Charts - Spacer, .038" thick knife
6 1 see Charts - Spacer, .038" thick knife (some assemblies require a final spacer; see Chart 2)
7 1 80145 - Nut, circular

Alternate parts
8 see Charts - Spacer, large diameter (see Chart 3 for important restrictions)
9 42844 - Knife Disc, 3.5" (used to produce a torn appearance)
 Section 10, Parts 10.49
Feed Spindle Assemblies, .038" thick feed discs
Chart 1 Feed Spindle Assembly, .038" thick feed discs
Space Between Spindle Item 4 Items 5 and 6
Feed Discs Assembly Feed Disc, Spacer, 1.4" O.D. .30"
Part Number .038" thick Part
inch mm Quantity Number Quantity
42525 22
.30 7.6 80221* 23 (42528)
42320 1
For producing crinkle cut French fries; slice thickness is set at .344" (8.7 mm);
feed discs are spaced .30" (7.6 mm) apart to contact the bottom of the crinkle.
Ordering a feed spindle
Feed spindles do not have assembly numbers (except for .30" spindle in Chart 1). Follow these steps when
ordering a customized feed spindle:
1. See the column titled “Reference Spindle Assembly” in Chart 2, and select the appropriate feed disc spacing.
The Reference Spindle Assembly contains all knives (42265) and 1.40" diameter spacers.
2. See “Feed Discs, .038 thick" on the following pages and choose a feed disc with the appropriate diameter.
Also choose the spacer with the appropriate diameter from Chart 2.
3. Substitute feed discs and spacers into the reference assembly.

Restrictions for Large Diameter Spacers

Slice Opening: the slice opening is restricted, see Chart 3
Stripper Plates: do not use stripper plate shims; do not use secondary stripper plates.
Feed Discs: the points on discs with small diameters will not protrude beyond the stripper plate.
Chart 2 Chart 3
Reference Assemblies for Feed Spindles, .038" thick feed discs Maximum slice setting with standard
Space Reference Item 4 Items 5 and 6 Item 8 Large Diameter stripper plate* and large diameter circular
Between Feed Spindle Feed Spacer, 1/4" O.D. Spacers (optional) knife spacers
Discs Assembly Disc Part Quantity (substitute for items 5 and 6) Circular Knife Stripper Maximum
inch mm Part Number Quantity Number Part No. Diameter Quantity Spacer Plate Slice Opening (M)
Diameter (D) Spacer (S) inch mm
Part Number
1/8 3.2 80132 55 42319 54 42603 2.08 54
42402 42 42604 2.08 42
5/32 4.0 80133 44
42320 1 42605 2.08 1
3/16 4.8 80134 37 42320 36 42605 2.08 36
43230 30
7/32 5.6 80520 32 – – –
42320 1
1/4 6.4 80135 28 42321 27 42606 2.08 27
42322 20 42665 1.80 20
5/16 7.9 80136 22
42324 1 42609 1.80 1
42802 18
11/32 8.7 80424 20
42821 1
– – – 80198 3/8 9.5
1.80" 80199 3/8 9.5
3/8 9.5 80137 19 42323 18 42608 1.80 18
80200 1/2 12.7
42633 14
7/16 11.1 80138 16 – – – 80198 1/4 6.4
42325 1
42324 13 2.08" 80199 5/16 7.9
1/2 12.7 80139 15 – – – 80200 3/8 9.5
42321 1
9/16 14.3 80140 13 42821 12 – – – * See Stripper Plates and Stripper Plate
42325 10 Spacers and Shims.
5/8 15.9 80141 12 – – –
42324 1
3/4 19.1 80142 10 42326 9 – – –
42482 7
7/8 22.2 80143 9 – – –
42325 1
42327 6
1 25.4 80144 8 – – –
42326 1
10.50 Section 10, Parts
Feed Discs, .038" thick

6 Point 12 Point 26 Point 28 Point

20 Point
 Section 10, Parts 10.51
Feed Discs, .038" thick
Selecting Feed Discs
Dimension (D) in the chart below is the minimum penetration
into the product for a given slice thickness and feed disc. Discs
with larger diameters (B) can be used for increased
penetration. To calculate penetration into the product for a disc,
take the slice thickness (A) you wish to cut and subtract
Distance from Slicing Knife (C) for that disc.
For example:

.50" (slice thickness)

– .40" (dimension “C” for disc 42349)
.10" (penetration into product)

12.7 mm (slice thickness)

– 10.2 mm (dimension “C” for disc 42349)
2.5 mm (penetration into product)

(A) Feed Disc, .038" thick (D)

Slice Thickness Minimum
Item Part Number (B) (C) Number of Penetration
inch mm Number Diameter Distance from Points into Product
Slicing Knife
fraction/decimal
inch mm inch mm inch mm

3/32 .09 2.3 1 42612 3.33 84.6 .05 1.1 28 .04 1.0
1/8 .13 3.2 2 42507 3.24 82.3 .09 2.3 6 .04 1.0
5/32 .16 4.0 3 42969 3.15 80.0 .14 3.5 28 .02 .5
3/16 .19 4.8 4 42351 3.10 78.7 .16 4.1 6 .03 .8
7/32 .22 5.6 5 42530 3.04 77.2 .19 4.8 28 .03 .8
1/4 .25 6.4 6 42570 2.98 75.5 .22 5.6 12 .03 .8
.29 7.4 .02 .5
.30 7.5 7 42529 2.88 73.2 .27 6.9 26 .03 .8
5/16 .31 7.9 .05 1.3
5/16 .31 7.9 8 42578 2.86 72.6 .28 7.1 12 .03 .8
11/32 .34 8.7 9 42528 2.80 71.1 .31 7.9 26 .04 1.0
3/8 .38 9.5 10 42350 2.74 69.6 .34 8.6 6 .04 1.0
3/8 .38 9.5 11 42776 2.72 69.1 .35 8.9 12 .03 .8
7/16 .44 11.1 12 42349 2.62 66.5 .40 10.2 6 .04 1.0
1/2 .50 12.7 13 42293 2.49 63.2 .46 11.7 6 .04 1.0
9/16 .56 14.2 14 42775 2.40 61.0 .51 13.0 12 .05 1.3
5/8 .63 15.9 15 42648 2.24 56.9 .59 15.0 6 .04 1.0
11/16 .69 17.5 16 42732 2.21 56.1 .62 15.7 12 .07 1.8
3/4 .75 19.1 17 42527 2.00 50.8 .71 18.0 20 .04 1.0
10.52 Section 10, Parts
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies, .058" thick knives, 1.4" dia. spacers

IMPORTANT
When assembling the spindle, alternate the flat area (A)
on the inside diameter of the knives from side-to-side on
the shaft. The shaft for .058" thick knives has flats (B) on
opposite sides. Assemble the spindle in this manner to
ensure that knives align with the slots in the stripper plate.
 Section 10, Parts 10.53
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies, .058" thick knives, 1.4" dia. spacers
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 see Chart - Spindle Assembly, circular, .058" knife (includes items 2–7)
2 1 80287 - Shaft, circular knife, hard, .058" knife
3 2 42489 - O-ring, 1/16" x 7/8" x 1", Viton
4 see Chart 42661 - Knife, circular, 3.5", plain, double bevel, .058" thick
5 see Chart see Chart - Spacer, .058" thick knife
6 1 see Chart - Spacer, .058" thick knife (some assemblies require a final spacer; see Chart 1)
7 1 80145 - Nut, circular

Alternate parts
8 42759 - Knife, circular, 3.5", serrated, double bevel, .058" thick
9 42773 - Spacer, filler, .058" thick, 1.40" O.D. (use in place of knives to change the size of cut)
– * - Feed Disc, .058" thick

* Circular spindles can be assembled with a combination of knives and feed discs. These spindles do not have part
numbers. See the following pages for feed discs and ordering information.

Chart 1
Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies, .058" thick knives
Size of Cut Circular Knife Item 4 Item 5 Item 6
Spindle 42661 Knife, Spacer Final
Assembly .058" thick Part Quantity Dia. Spacer
inch mm Part Number Quantity Number (inch) Quantity: 1

1/8 3.2 80290* 55 42723 54 1.40 –

5/32 4.0 80291 44 42753 42 1.40 42754
3/16 4.8 80292 37 42754 36 1.40 –
1/4 6.4 80293 28 42684 27 1.40 –
5/16 7.9 80294 22 42686 20 1.40 42689
3/8 9.5 80295 19 42687 18 1.40 –
7/16 11.1 80296 16 42688 14 1.40 42690
1/2 12.7 80297 15 42689 13 1.40 42684
9/16 14.3 80298 13 42832 12 1.40 –
5/8 15.9 80299 12 42690 10 1.40 42689
3/4 19.1 80300 10 42691 9 1.40 –
7/8 22.2 80301 9 42692 7 1.40 42690
1 25.4 80302 8 42693 6 1.40 42691
* Slight variations in knife and spacer thickness combined with the large number of
knives and spacers may prevent the knives from properly aligning with the slots in
the stripper plate. Consult an Urschel representative for additional information on
the use of these parts.
10.54 Section 10, Parts
Circular Knife Spindles with Large Diameter Spacers, .058" thick knives

Item Quantity Part Number and Description

1 1 see Charts - Spindle Assembly, circular, .058" knife (includes items 2–7)
2 1 80287 - Shaft, circular knife, hard, .058 knife
3 2 42489 - O-ring, 1/16" x 7/8" x 1", Viton
4 see Charts 42661 - Knife, circular, 3.5", plain, double bevel, .058" thick
5 see Charts see Charts - Spacer, .058" thick knife
6 1 see Charts - Spacer, .058" thick knife (some assemblies require a final spacer; see Chart 1)
7 1 80145 - Nut, circular

See Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies, .058" thick knives, 1.4" diameter spacers for alternate parts.

Alternate parts
8 43233 - Spacer, filler, .058" thick, 1.80" O.D. (use in place of knives to change the size of cut)
9 43234 - Spacer, filler, .058" thick, 2.08" O.D. (use in place of knives to change the size of cut)
 Section 10, Parts 10.55
Circular Knife Spindles with Large Diameter Spacers, .058" thick knives
Restrictions for Large Diameter Spacers
Slice Opening: the slice opening is restricted, see Chart 2
Stripper Plates: do not use stripper plate shims; do not use secondary stripper plates.
Feed Discs: the points on discs with small diameters will not protrude beyond the stripper plate (see
“Feed Spindle Assemblies, .058" thick feed discs” on the following pages).

Chart 1 Chart 2
Reference Assemblies and large diameter spacers, Maximum slice setting with standard
.058" thick knives stripper plate* and large diameter circular
knife spacers
Space between Reference Item 4 Items 5 and 6
Knives or Feed Spindle Knife, Large Diameter Spacers Circular Knife Stripper Maximum
Spacer Plate Slice Opening (M)
Discs Assembly .058" thick Part No. Diameter Quantity
Diameter (D) Spacer (S) inch mm
inch mm Part Number Quantity Part Number
1/8 3.2 80290* 55 42724 2.08 54
3/16 4.8 80292 37 42767 2.08 36
1/4 6.4 80293 28 42696 2.08 27
42698 2.08 20
5/16 7.9 80294 22
42725 2.08 1
42699 1.80 18
3/8 9.5 80295 19
42837 2.08 18
3/4 19.1 80300 10 43078 1.80 9
80198 3/8 9.5
* Slight variations in knife and spacer thickness combined with the
large number of knives and spacers may prevent the knives from 1.80" 80199 3/8 9.5
properly aligning with the slots in the stripper plate. Consult an 80200 1/2 12.7
Urschel representative for additional information.
80198 1/4 6.4
2.08" 80199 5/16 7.9
80200 3/8 9.5
* See Stripper Plates and Stripper Plate
Spacers and Shims.
10.56 Section 10, Parts
Circular Knife Spindles with Feed Discs, .058" thick knives

Item Quantity Part Number and Description

1 1 see Chart - Spindle Assembly, circular, .058" knife (includes items 2–8)
2 1 80287 - Shaft, circular knife, hard, .038" knife, ACME thread
3 2 42489 - O-ring, 1/16" x 7/8" x 1", Viton
4 see Chart 42661 - Knife, circular, 3.5", plain, double bevel, .058" thick
5 see Chart see Chart - Feed Disc, .058" thick
6 see Chart see Chart - Spacer, .058" thick knife
7 1 see Chart - Spacer, .058" thick knife (some assemblies require a final spacer; see Chart 1)
8 1 80145 - Nut, circular

See Circular Knife Spindle Assemblies, .058" thick knives, 1.4" diameter spacers for alternate parts.
 Section 10, Parts 10.57
Circular Knife Spindles with Feed Discs, .058" thick knives

Ordering a spindle with Alternate Parts

Spindles with knife and feed disc combinations do not have assembly numbers.
To order a spindle with a customized set of knives, feed discs and spacers, follow these steps when ordering:
1. See the column titled “Reference Spindle Assembly” in Chart 1, and select the appropriate knife and feed disc
spacing. The Reference Spindle Assembly contains all knives (42265) and 1.40" diameter spacers.
2. Choose knives, feed discs and spacers from the previous and following pages.
3. Substitute parts into the reference assembly.

Restrictions apply to some parts; see the instructions on the corresponding pages.

Chart 1
Reference Assemblies for Spindles with
Knives and Feed Discs, .058" thick
Space Between Reference Item 4 Knife and Item 6 Spacer*
Feed Discs Spindle Item 5 Feed Disc, (final spacer required
Assembly .058" thick on some spindles)
inch mm Part Number Total Quantity Quantity Final Spacer

1/8 3.2 80290** 55 54 –

5/32 4.0 80291 44 42 1
3/16 4.8 80292 37 36 –
1/4 6.4 80293 28 27 –
5/16 7.9 80294 22 20 1
3/8 9.5 80295 19 18 –
7/16 11.1 80296 16 14 1
1/2 12.7 80297 15 13 1
9/16 14.3 80298 13 12 –
5/8 15.9 80299 12 10 1
3/4 19.1 80300 10 9 –
7/8 22.2 80301 9 7 1
1 25.4 80302 8 6 1
* 1.40" diameter spacers are standard on the reference spindle assembly.
Spindles can also be assembled with 1.80" and 2.08" diameter spacers.
** Slight variations in disc and spacer thickness combined with the large
number of discs and spacers may prevent the discs from properly
aligning with the slots in the stripper plate. Consult an Urschel
representative for additional information.
10.58 Section 10, Parts
Feed Spindle Assemblies, .058" thick feed discs

Item Quantity Part Number and Description

1 1 see Charts - Spindle Assembly, feed (includes items 2–7)
2 1 80287 - Shaft, circular knife, hard, .058" knife
3 2 42489 - O-ring, 1/16" x 7/8" x 1", Viton
4 see Charts see Charts - Feed Disc, .058" thick (see “Feed Discs, .058" thick” on the following pages)
5 see Charts see Charts - Spacer, .058" thick knife
6 1 see Charts - Spacer, .058" thick knife (some assemblies require a final spacer; see Chart 1)
7 1 80145 - Nut, circular

Alternate parts
8 see Charts see Charts - Spacer, large diameter (see Chart 3 for important restrictions)
 Section 10, Parts 10.59
Feed Spindle Assemblies, .058" thick feed discs
Ordering a feed spindle
Feed spindles do not have assembly numbers. Follow these steps when ordering:
1. See the column titled “Reference Spindle Assembly” in Chart 1, and select the appropriate feed disc spacing
and spacer diameter. The Reference Spindle Assembly contains all knives (42661).
2. See “Feed Discs, .058 thick" on the following pages and choose a feed disc with the appropriate diameter.
3. Substitute feed discs and spacers into the reference assembly.

Restrictions for Large Diameter Spacers

Slice Opening: the slice opening is restricted, see Chart 2
Stripper Plates: do not use stripper plate shims; do not use secondary stripper plates.
Feed Discs: the points on discs with small diameters will not protrude beyond the stripper plate.

Chart 1 Chart 2
Reference Assemblies for Feed Spindles, .058" thick feed discs Maximum slice setting with standard
Space Reference Item 4 Items 5 and 6 Item 8 Large Diameter stripper plate* and large diameter circular
Between Spindle Feed Spacer, 1/4" O.D. Spacers (optional) knife spacers
Feed Discs Assembly Disc Part Quantity (substitute for items 5 and 6) Circular Stripper Maximum
inch mm Part Number Quantity Number Part No. Diameter Quantity Knife Plate Slice Opening (M)
Spacer Spacer (S)
Diameter (D) Part Number inch mm
1/8 3.2 80290* 55 42723 54 42724 2.08 54
42753 42
5/32 4.0 80291 44 – – –
42754 1
3/16 4.8 80292 37 42754 36 42767 2.08 36
1/4 6.4 80293 28 42684 27 42696 2.08 27
42686 20 42698 2.08 20
5/16 7.9 80294 22
42689 1 42725 2.08 1
42699 1.80 18
3/8 9.5 80295 19 42687 18
42837 2.08 18
42688 14 80198 3/8 9.5
7/16 11.1 80296 16 – – –
42690 1 1.80" 80199 3/8 9.5
42689 13 80200 1/2 12.7
1/2 12.7 80297 15 – – –
42684 1 80198 1/4 6.4
9/16 14.3 80298 13 42832 12 – – – 2.08" 80199 5/16 7.9
5/8 15.9 80299 12
42690 10
– – – 80200 3/8 9.5
42689 1
* See Stripper Plates and Stripper Plate
3/4 19.1 80300 10 42691 9 43078 1.80 9 Spacers and Shims.
42692 7
7/8 22.2 80301 9 – – –
42690 1
42692 6
1 25.4 80302 8 – – –
42693 1
* Slight variations in disc and spacer thickness combined with the large number
of discs and spacers may prevent the discs from properly aligning with the slots
in the stripper plate. Consult an Urschel representative for additional information.
10.60 Section 10, Parts
Feed Discs, .058" thick

6 Point 9 Point 20 Point 28 Point

26 Point

12 Point
 Section 10, Parts 10.61
Feed Discs, .058" thick
Selecting Feed Discs
Dimension (D) in the chart below is the minimum penetration
into the product for a given slice thickness and feed disc. Discs
with larger diameters (B) can be used for increased
penetration. To calculate penetration into the product for a disc,
take the slice thickness (A) you wish to cut and subtract
Distance from Slicing Knife (C) for that disc.
For example:

.50" (slice thickness)

– .40" (dimension “C” for disc 42736)
.10" (penetration into product)

12.7 mm (slice thickness)

– 10.2 mm (dimension “C” for disc 42736)
2.5 mm (penetration into product)

Chart 1
(A) Feed Disc, .058" thick (D)
Slice Thickness Minimum
Item Part (B) (C) Number of Penetration
inch mm Number Number Diameter Distance from Points into product
fraction/decimal
inch mm Slicing Knife inch mm
inch mm
For granulating 1 43061 3.54 89.9 – 28 –
3/32 .09 2.3 2 42741 3.33 84.6 .05 1.1 28 .04 1.0
3 42740 3.24 82.3 .09 2.3 6 .04 1.0
1/8 .13 3.2
4 43054 3.24 82.3 .09 2.3 9 .04 1.0
3/16 .19 4.8 5 42866 3.10 78.7 .16 4.1 6 .03 .8
1/4 .25 6.4 6 42854 2.98 75.5 .22 5.6 12 .03 .8
.29 7.4 .02 .5
.30 7.5 7 42731 2.88 73.2 .27 6.9 26 .03 .8
5/16 .31 7.9 .05 1.3
5/16 .31 7.9 8 42730 2.86 72.6 .28 7.1 12 .03 .8
11/32 .34 8.7 9 42738 2.80 71.1 .31 7.9 26 .04 1.0
3/8 .38 9.5 10 42737 2.74 69.6 .34 8.6 6 .04 1.0
7/16 .44 11.1 11 42736 2.62 66.5 .40 10.2 6 .04 1.0
1/2 .50 12.7 12 42735 2.49 63.2 .46 11.7 6 .04 1.0
5/8 .63 15.9 13 42734 2.24 56.9 .59 15.0 6 .04 1.0
5/8 .63 15.9 14 42733 2.21 56.1 .61 15.5 12 .02 .5
3/4 .75 19.1 15 42743 2.00 50.8 .71 18.0 20 .04 1.0
10.62 Section 10, Parts
Stripper Plates
See the chart below for stripper plate features and restrictions.
The chart on the next page lists stripper plates for use at different circular knife or feed disc
spacing.
The following pages show stripper plates and spacers used at different slice settings.
See Section 6 Machine Setup for a description of stripper plates and application information.

Chart 1
Abbreviations and Descriptions Restrictions
STD - Standard Profile Maximum slice opening is 5/8" (15.9 mm) with 1.4"
The standard stripper plate has the profile shown at the diameter circular spacers.
Other restrictions apply when using large diameter
left. The slots are .085" (2.2mm) wide unless otherwise
circular spacers. See the charts on the following
indicated. pages.

R - Relieved Profile
This stripper plate has slots that are relieved (1), or
partially cut through, to the trailing edge. The slots are
.085" (2.2mm) wide unless otherwise indicated.
1
WS - Wide Slot
The abbreviation is followed by the slot width, for example diameter circular spacers.
WS125 indicates a slot width of .125".
Maximum slice opening is 5/8" (15.9 mm) with 1.4"
diameter circular spacers.
Other restrictions apply when using large diameter
circular spacers. See the charts on the following
pages.
Maximum slice opening is 5/8" (15.9 mm) with 1.4"

OE - Open End
The slots are completely cut through to the trailing
edge (2).
2
CO - Cut-Off
The cut off stripper plate has the profile shown. The slots
are .085" wide unless otherwise indicated. It is used with
the extended secondary stripper plate (see below).This
design allows the slice gate to open further for larger cuts.
Maximum slice opening is 5/8" (15.9 mm) with 1.4"
diameter circular spacers.
Other restrictions apply when using large diameter
circular spacers. See the charts on the following
pages.
Maximum slice opening is 3/4" (19.1 mm) with 1.4"
diameter circular spacers. See the charts on the
following pages. Use of a stripper plate spacer and
gate extension is required. See the parts list on the
following pages.

STD - Standard (secondary) The secondary stripper plates cannot be used with
Standard profile for the secondary stripper plate. The large diameter circular knife spacers.
slots are .093" (2.4mm) wide unless otherwise indicated;
available with wide slots (WS), see above.

EXT - Extended (secondary) The secondary stripper plates cannot be used with
The profile of the extended secondary stripper large diameter circular knife spacers.
4 3
plate (3) is wider at the base compared to the profile of
the standard secondary stripper plate (4). The slots are
.093" (2.4mm) wide unless otherwise indicated; available
with wide slots (WS), see above.
 Section 10, Parts 10.63
Stripper Plates

Chart 2
Circular Stripper Plates Example:
Part Slot Spacing Feature
Knife and Part Number is followed by the slot spacing in inches and the following abbreviations. Number (inch) Abbreviation
Feed Disc STD = Standard Profile R = Relieved Profile (see previous page)
Spacing WS = Wide Slot, slot width, decimal inch OE = Open End
80399-3/16 (R,WS110)
CO = Cut Off Extended = (EXT)
inch mm Stripper Plate Secondary Stripper Plate
(mounts to slice gate) (mounts to circular support)
80068 1/8 (R)
1/8 3.2 80289-1/8 (STD)
IMPORTANT Do not use 1/8" stripper plates at larger cut sizes; the ribs may be damaged.

5/32 4.0 80159-5/32 (R) 80255-5/32 (STD)

80160-3/16 (R) 80237-3/16 (CO) 80390-3/16 (OE) 80256-3/16 (STD)
3/16 4.8
80399-3/16 (R,WS110) 80355-3/16 (EXT)
7/32 5.6 80517-7/32 (R) –
80069-1/4 (STD) 80349-1/4 (WS125) 80238-1/4 (CO) 80173-1/4 (STD)
1/4 6.4
80391-1/4 (OE) 80304-1/4 (EXT)
.300 7.6 80222-.300 (STD) –
80255-5/32 (STD)
5/16 7.9 80161-5/16 (STD) 80239-5/16 (CO) 80392-5/16 (OE)
80257-5/16 (STD)
80160-3/16 (R) 80237-3/16 (CO) 80390-3/16 (OE) 80256-3/16 (STD)
3/8 9.5 80399-3/16 (R, WS110) 80070-3/8 (STD) 80356-3/8 (WS188) 80355-3/8 (STD)
80240-3/8 (CO) 80393-3/8 (OE) 80348-3/8 (EXT)
7/16 11.1 80162-7/16 (STD) –
80069-1/4 (STD) 80349-1/4 (WS125) 80238-1/4 (CO)
80173-1/4 (STD)
1/2 12.7 80391-1/4 (OE) 80071-1/2 (STD) 80241-1/2 (CO)
80304-1/4 (EXT)
80394-1/2 (OE)
9/16 14.3 80229-9/16 (STD) 80242-9/16 (CO) 80395-9/16 (OE) 80256-3/16 (STD) 80355-3/16 (EXT)
80161-5/16 (STD) 80239-5/16 (CO) 80392-5/16 (OE) 80255-5/32 (STD) 80257-5/16 (STD)
5/8 15.9
80072-5/8 (STD) 80357-5/8 (CO) 80272-5/8 (STD) 80318-5/8 (EXT)
80069-1/4 (STD) 80349-1/4 (WS) 80238-1/4 (CO) 80256-3/16 (STD) 80355-3/16 (EXT)
80391-1/4 (OE) 80070-3/8 (R,OE) 80356-3/8 (WS188) 80173-1/4 (STD) 80348-3/8 (STD)
3/4 19.1
80240-3/8 (CO) 80393-3/8 (OE) 80409-3/4 (CO,WS125) 80304-1/4 (EXT) 80073-3/4 (STD)
80361-3/4 (CO) 80324-3/4 (EXT)
7/8 22.2 – 80074-7/8 (STD)
80173-1/4 (STD)
1 25.4 – 80075-1 (STD)
80408-1 (WS125)
10.64 Section 10, Parts
Stripper Plate Spacers and Shims

Item Quantity Part Number and Description

1 3 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
2 1 see Charts - Stripper Plate (mounts to stripper plate spacer/slice gate)
3 3 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
4 1 80198 - Stripper Plate Spacer, 0"-1/4" (0-6 mm, includes item 5)
5 4 10311 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 3/8", s.s.
6 1 80199 - Stripper Plate Spacer, 1/4"-7/16" (6-13 mm, includes item 7)
7 4 10221 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 1/2", s.s.
8 1 80200 - Stripper Plate Spacer, 7/16"-5/8" (13-19 mm, includes item 9)
9 4 10221 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 1/2", s.s.
10 1 80358 - Stripper Spacer, 5/8"-3/4", STR (includes item 11)
11 4 10311 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 3/8", s.s.
12 1 80407 - Stripper Spacer, leafy product (includes item 13)
13 4 10311 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 3/8", s.s.
14 1 80201 - Shim, .048", stripper spacer (for cutting leafy or compressible product)
15 1 80202 - Shim, .077", stripper spacer (for cutting leafy or compressible product)
16 1 see Charts - Stripper Plate, secondary (mounts to the circular support)
17 2 10047 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 5/16-18 x 1", s.s.
 Section 10, Parts 10.65
Stripper Plate Spacers and Shims
Stripper Plate Spacers and Slice Setting 1
The stripper plate spacer (1) is installed between the stripper plate and slice
gate. Choose a spacer based on the slice setting. A shim (2) can be used as
shown in the illustration on the previous page (typically used with leafy or
compressible products). The use of a shim will restrict the slice opening. 2
Charts 1, 2 and 3: the slice range (3) is marked on the spacer. The top of
the range applies when using 1.4" diameter circular knife spacers. 3
Chart 4: the slice setting is restricted when using large diameter circular knife
spacers.

Chart 1 Chart 2 Chart 3

Standard Stripper Plates Spacer (S) and Slice Secondary Stripper Plates Spacer (S) and Slice Leafy Product Stripper Plate Spacer
(STD) Opening Range (A) and Cut Off Stripper Plate Opening Range (A) With standard (STD) primary and
inch mm inch mm secondary* stripper plates
Primary standard stripper plate only Secondary standard stripper plate only Stripper Circular Maximum
Plate Knife Slice Opening
80198 – Spacer (S) Spacer (A)
0-1/4 0-6 5/8-1 16-25 Part Number Diameter (D) inch mm

80199
1/4-7/16 6-11

80200
7/16-5/8 11-16

Primary and secondary standard stripper plates Cut Off (CO) stripper plate and
Extended (EXT) Secondary Stripper Plate
80198
0-1/4 0-6 80358 80407 1.4" 1/4 6.4
5/8-3/4 16-19
*Use of a secondary stripper plate is
80199 (Use with 80359 gate optional with a leafy product spacer.
1/4-7/16 6-11 extension shown on
the following page.)
80200
7/16-5/8 11-16

Chart 4
Maximum slice setting with standard stripper NOTICE
plate and large diameter circular knife spacers Do not exceed the maximum slice opening dimensions
Circular Knife Stripper Maximum listed in the charts. Exceeding the maximum opening may
Spacer Plate Slice Opening (M) damage parts or cause a product jam in the cutting parts.
Diameter (D) Spacer (S) inch mm
Part Number

80198 3/8 9.5

1.80" 80199 3/8 9.5
Restrictions for Large Diameter Circular Spacers (Chart 4):
80200 1/2 12.7
Stripper Plates: do not use stripper plate shims; do not use
80198 1/4 6.4 secondary stripper plates.
2.08" 80199 5/16 7.9 Feed Discs: the points on discs with smaller diameters will not
80200 3/8 9.5 protrude beyond the stripper plate.
10.66 Section 10, Parts
Gate Extensions
 Section 10, Parts 10.67
Gate Extensions
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Gate extensions for straight cut
1 2 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
2 1 80146 - Gate Extension, 1/4"-1/2", straight (6.4-12.7 mm, includes item 3)
3 2 10311 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 3/8", s.s.
4 1 80147 - Gate Extension, 1/2"-3/4", straight (12.7-19.1 mm, includes item 5)
5 2 10221 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 1/2", s.s.
6 2 10425 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8", s.s., low head
7 1 80359 - Gate Extension, 5/8"-3/4", straight (15.9-19.1 mm, includes item 8)
8 2 10221 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 1/2", s.s.
9 1 80148 - Gate Extension, 3/4"-1", straight (19.1-25.4 mm, includes item 10)
10 2 10221 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 1/2", s.s.

Gate extensions for crinkle cut

11 2 10424 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s., low head
12 1 80181 - Gate Extension, 1/4"-1/2", crinkle (6.4-12.7 mm, includes item 13)
13 2 10311 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 3/8", s.s.
14 1 80182 - Gate Extension, 1/2"-3/4", crinkle (12.7-19.1 mm, includes item 15)
15 2 10221 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 1/2", s.s.
16 2 10425 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8", s.s., low head
17 1 80183 - Gate Extension, 3/4"-1", crinkle (19.1-25.4 mm, includes item 18)
18 2 10221 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 1/2", s.s.
10.68 Section 10, Parts
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 3/32–1/4" (2.4–6.4mm)

Use 65 in/lb
Torque Wrench
 Section 10, Parts 10.69
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 3/32–1/4" (2.4–6.4mm)
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 * - Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly, narrow knife (includes items 2–6)
2 1 * - Spindle, crosscut
3 * 80109 - Knife, crosscut, straight, narrow
4 2 42554 - Retaining Ring, small cuts 3/32" to 1/4" (for narrow knife spindles)
5 12 10090 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8", s.s.
6 1 80149 - Protective Sleeve, crosscut spindle, DC (supplied with spindle assembly)

* See chart below.

3/32"–1/4", Straight Knife (narrow)

Fractional Spindle Item 2 Item 3
Size of Cut Assembly Crosscut Knife Qty.
inch mm Spindle (Narrow)
3/32 2.4 80204 80203 114
1/8 3.2 80119 80096 82
5/32 4.0 80120 80097 66
3/16 4.8 80121 80098 55
7/32 5.6 80519 80518 48
1/4 6.4 80122 80099 41
10.70 Section 10, Parts
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 9/32–9/16" (7.1–14.3mm)

Use 40 in/lb
Torque Wrench
 Section 10, Parts 10.71
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 9/32–9/16" (7.1–14.3mm)
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 * - Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly, standard knife (includes items 2–7)
2 1 * - Spindle, crosscut
3 * 80110 - Knife, crosscut, straight (choose straight or crinkle)
4 * 80205 - Knife, crosscut, crinkle (choose straight or crinkle)
5 2 42553 - Retaining Ring, medium cuts 9/32" to 9/16" (for standard knife spindles)
6 12 10090 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8", s.s.
7 1 80149 - Protective Sleeve, crosscut spindle, DC (supplied with spindle assembly)

* See chart below.

9/32"–9/16", Straight and Crinkle Knives (standard)

Fractional Spindle Spindle Item 2 Items 3, 4
Size of Cut Assembly Assembly Crosscut Knife Qty.
inch mm (straight cut) (crinkle cut) Spindle (Standard)
9/32 7.1 80206 80213 80192 36
5/16 7.9 80123 80214 80100 33
11/32 8.7 80322 ---- 80311 31
3/8 9.5 80124 80215 80101 28
7/16 11.1 80125 80216 80102 24
1/2 12.7 80126 80217 80103 21
9/16 14.3 80127 80218 80104 19

NOTICE
Do not use crinkle crosscut knives with the straight slicing knife or slicing
knife holder. Doing so will cause the crosscut knives to strike the shear
edge. Use crinkle slicing knives and slicing knife holders with crinkle
crosscut knives.
10.72 Section 10, Parts
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 5/8–1" (15.9–25.4mm)

Use 40 in/lb
Torque Wrench
 Section 10, Parts 10.73
Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 5/8–1" (15.9–25.4mm)
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 * - Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly, wide knife (includes items 2–6)
2 1 * - Spindle, crosscut
3 * 80111 - Knife, crosscut, straight, wide (used only for cuts larger than 9/16")
4 2 42552 - Retaining Ring, large cuts 5/8" to 1" (for wide knife spindles)
5 10 10090 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8", s.s.
6 1 80149 - Protective Sleeve, crosscut spindle, DC (supplied with spindle assembly)

* See chart below.

5/8"–1", Straight Knife (wide)

Fractional Spindle Item 2 Item 3
Size of Cut Assembly Crosscut Knife Qty.
inch mm Spindle (Wide)
5/8 15.9 80128 80105 17
3/4 19.1 80129 80106 14
7/8 22.2 80130 80107 12
1 25.4 80131 80108 10
10.74 Section 10, Parts
Acetal Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 3/32–3/8" (2.4–9.5mm)

Use 65 in/lb
Torque Wrench

Use 40 in/lb
Torque Wrench
 Section 10, Parts 10.75
Acetal Crosscut Knife Spindle Assemblies, 3/32–3/8" (2.4–9.5mm)
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Acetal is a high-strength plastic; these spindles are for soft products only
– 1 * - Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly, Acetal (includes items 1–7)
1 1 * - Spindle, crosscut, Acetal (includes items 2–3)
2 1 80345 - Crosscut Spindle Insert, Acetal
3 4 10408 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1-1/8", s.s.
4 * 80109 - Knife, crosscut, straight, narrow
5 2 80350 - Retaining Ring, small cuts, 1/8" to 1/4"
6 12 10090 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8", s.s.
7 1 80149 - Protective Sleeve, crosscut spindle, DC (supplied with spindle assembly)

– 1 ** - Crosscut Knife Spindle Assembly, Acetal (includes items 8–14)

8 1 ** - Spindle, crosscut, Acetal (includes items 9–10)
9 1 80345 - Crosscut Spindle Insert, Acetal
10 4 10408 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1-1/8", s.s.
11 ** 80110 - Knife, crosscut, straight
12 2 80351 - Retaining Ring, medium cuts, 5/16" to 3/8"
13 12 10090 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8", s.s.
14 1 80149 - Protective Sleeve, crosscut spindle, DC (supplied with spindle assembly)

* See chart 1 below.

** See chart 2 below.

Chart 1
Acetal spindle, 3/32"–1/4", Straight Knife (narrow)
Fractional Spindle Item 1 Item 4
Size of Cut Assembly Crosscut Knife Qty.
inch mm Spindle (Narrow)
3/32 2.4 80397 80396 114
1/8 3.2 80339 80333 82
5/32 4.0 80340 80334 66
3/16 4.8 80341 80335 55
1/4 6.4 80342 80336 41

Chart 2
Acetal spindle, 9/32"–3/8", Straight Knife (medium)
Fractional Spindle Item 8 Item 11
Size of Cut Assembly Crosscut Knife Qty.
inch mm Spindle (Medium)
9/32 7.1 80385 80384 36
5/16 7.9 80343 80337 33
3/8 9.5 80344 80338 28
10.76 Section 10, Parts
Shred Spindle Assembly

Use 65 in/lb
Torque Wrench
 Section 10, Parts 10.77
Shred Spindle Assembly
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Shredding Spindle Assemblies; common parts for all assemblies
1 1 80305* - Spindle, crosscut, shred
2 1 80306 - Alignment Rod, shredding, crosscut
3 2 42280 - Retaining Ring, large cuts
4 10 10090 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8", s.s.

Assembly with 10 point discs

-- 1 80308 - Crosscut Spindle Assembly, shred, 10 point (includes items 5–7 and common parts)
5 14 43223 - Shredding Disc, .25" x 10 points
6 13 42781 - Spacer, shredding, crosscut
7 1 43225**- Spacer, shredding, crosscut (.165" thick)

Assembly with 20 point discs

-- 1 80307 - Crosscut Spindle Assembly, shred, 10 point (includes items 5–7 and common parts)
8 14 42780 - Shredding Disc, .25" x 20 points
9 13 42781 - Spacer, shredding, crosscut
10 1 43225**- Spacer, shredding, crosscut (.165" thick)

Assembly with 30 point discs

-- 1 80310***- Crosscut Spindle Assembly, shred, 10 point (includes items 5–7 and common parts)
11 25 43062 - Shredding Disc, 1/8" x 30 points
12 24 43225 - Spacer, shredding, crosscut (.165" thick)

* The shredding spindle can be assembled with different quantities of shred discs and crosscut spacers or no
crosscut spacers (refer to the illustration on the previous page).
Assemblies with discs only are available but do not have part numbers.
Assemblies with .25" thick, 10 and 20 point discs: the total number of discs and spacers must equal 27 plus
one (1) final .165" spacer.
Assemblies with .125" thick, 30 point discs: the total number of discs and spacers must equal 49.
The number and arrangement of discs and spacers will affect the shred; consult an Urschel representative for
additional information.
** This spacer goes on the end of the crosscut spindle before the retaining ring.
*** This assembly begins and ends with a shred disc.
10.78 Section 10, Parts
Spindle Assembly, Impeller Shaft
 Section 10, Parts 10.79
Spindle Assembly, Impeller Shaft
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 6 10059 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4", s.s.
2 6 10015 - Lockwasher, 3/8", s.s.
3 1 80118 - Spindle Assembly, impeller shaft (includes items 4–16)
4 1 80042 - Impeller Shaft
5 1 19182 - Key, 1/4" x 1/4" x 2-3/8"
6 1 43215 - Seal
– 1 24053 - Roller Bearing (includes items 7–8)
7 1 24054 - Roller Bearing Cup, 3-7/16" O.D.
8 1 24058 - Roller Bearing Cone, 1-3/4" I.D.
9 1 80043 - Bearing Housing, impeller
– 1 24052 - Roller Bearing (includes items 10–11)
10 1 24054 - Roller Bearing Cup, 3-7/16" O.D.
11 1 24056 - Roller Bearing Cone, 1-5/8" I.D.
12 1 42677 - Hub, impeller shaft (includes item 13)
13 1 10141 - Socket Set Screw, 5/16-18 x 1/2", Nylok, s.s.
14 1 24140 - Shims, set of six
15 1 24046 - End Cap
16 3 10407 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/4", Nylok
10.80 Section 10, Parts
Spindle Assembly, Circular Shaft
 Section 10, Parts 10.81
Spindle Assembly, Circular Shaft
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 4 10113 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4", s.s.
2 4 10015 - Lockwasher, 3/8", s.s.
3 1 80031 - Spindle Assembly, circular shaft (includes items 4–18)
4 1 80030 - Shaft, circular spindle, 1/4-20 holes
5 1 18066 - Key, 1/4" x 1/4" x 2"
6 1 42221 - Seal
– 1 42218 - Roller Bearing (includes items 7–8)
7 1 42216 - Roller Bearing Cup, 2-7/16" O.D.
8 1 42220 - Roller Bearing Cone, 1-1/4" I.D.
9 1 80223 - O-Ring, 1/16" x 1-5/8" x 1-3/4", Viton
10 1 80029 - Spindle Housing, circular
– 1 42215 - Roller Bearing (includes items 11–12)
11 1 42216 - Roller Bearing Cup, 2-7/16" O.D.
12 1 42217 - Roller Bearing Cone, 1-3/16" I.D.
13 1 80219 - Hub, circular spindle shaft (includes item 14)
14 1 10141 - Socket Set Screw, 5/16-18 x 1/2", Nylok, s.s.
15 1 42457 - Shims, set of six
16 1 53036 - End Cap
17 1 80282 - O-Ring, 1/16" x 3" x 3-1/8", Viton
18 3 10406 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 3/4", Nylok
19 1 42640 - Drive Coupling, 2.3" O.D. (includes item 20)
20 2 37040 - Dowel Pin, 1/4" x 5/8", 416 s.s.
21 3 10593 - Lockwasher, 1/4", vibration resistant
22 3 10592 - Button Head Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8"
10.82 Section 10, Parts
Spindle Assembly, Crosscut Shaft
 Section 10, Parts 10.83
Spindle Assembly, Crosscut Shaft
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 4 10058 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1", s.s.
2 4 10015 - Lockwasher, 3/8", s.s.
3 1 80036 - Spindle Assembly, crosscut shaft (includes items 4–17)
4 1 80033 - Shaft, crosscut
5 1 19182 - Key, 1/4" x 1/4" x 2-3/8"
6 1 42208 - Seal
– 1 24053 - Roller Bearing (includes items 7–8)
7 1 24054 - Roller Bearing Cup, 3-7/16" O.D.
8 1 24058 - Roller Bearing Cone, 1-3/4" I.D.
9 1 80032 - Spindle Housing, crosscut
– 1 22037 - Roller Bearing (includes items 10–11)
10 1 22183 - Roller Bearing Cup, 2-5/8" O.D.
11 1 22184 - Roller Bearing Cone, 1-3/8" I.D.
12 1 80220 - Hub, crosscut spindle shaft (includes item 13)
13 1 10141 - Socket Set Screw, 5/16-18 x 1/2", Nylok, s.s.
14 1 53042 - Shims, set of six
15 1 80279 - End Cap, crosscut spindle
16 1 80283 - O-ring, 1/16" x 2-1/8" x 2-1/4", Viton
17 3 10406 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 3/4", Nylok
10.84 Section 10, Parts
Idler Assembly
 Section 10, Parts 10.85
Idler Assembly
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 4 10113 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4", s.s.
2 4 10015 - Lockwasher, 3/8", s.s.
3 1 80441 - Idler Assembly (includes items 4–9)
4 1 80439 - Shaft, idler
5 1 80436 - Pulley, timing, 40 teeth, RPP 8 mm
6 1 80442 - Ball Bearing (pair)
7 1 80443 - Retaining Ring, internal, 80 mm
8 1 80435 - Shield, bearing
9 1 80495 - Bearing Lock Nut, s.s.
10.86 Section 10, Parts
Lubrication Assembly
 Section 10, Parts 10.87
Lubrication Assembly
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
– 80491 - Lubrication Assembly (includes items 1–7)
1 4 11401 - Grease Fitting, 1/8", straight, s.s.
2 2 11426 - 1/4" Tube to 1/8" Pipe, male
3 2 11427 - Elbow, male, 1/4" tube to 1/8" pipe
4 4 45195 - Bulkhead, connector, female
5 1 80537 - Grease Tube, impeller, 26" long (for the impeller)
6 1 80538 - Grease Tube, circular, 28" long (for the circular)
7 2 80539 - Grease Tube, crosscut, 24" long (for the crosscut and idler)
10.88 Section 10, Parts
Motor and Motor Pulley
 Section 10, Parts 10.89
Motor and Motor Pulley
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 80053 -
Motor, 1-1/2 hp, 200-230/460 volt, stainless steel, 1.125" shaft diameter
1 80054 -
Motor, 1-1/2 hp, 200-240/380-415 volt, stainless steel, 1.125" shaft diameter
1 80055 -
Motor, 1-1/2 hp, 575 volt, stainless steel, 1.125" shaft diameter
2 1 19182 -
Key, 1/4" x 1/4" x 2-3/8"
3 1 80486 -
Motor, 3 hp, 200-230/460 volt, stainless steel, 1.375" shaft diameter
1 80487 -
Motor, 3 hp, 200-240/380-415 volt, stainless steel, 1.375" shaft diameter
1 80488 -
Motor, 3 hp, 575 volt, stainless steel, 1.375" shaft diameter
4 1 23566 -
Key, 5/16" x 5/16" x 2-13/32"
5 4 10074 -
Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/2-13 x 1-1/2", s.s.
6 4 10016 -
Lock Washer, 1/2", s.s.
7 4 10010 -
Washer, flat, 1/2", s.s.
8 1 80234 -
Pulley, timing, 31 teeth, RPP 8mm, 1.125" I.D. (for 1-1/2 hp motor, 50 hertz,
includes item 9)
9 2 10136 - Socket Set Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/16", cup point, s.s.
10 1 42354 - Pulley, timing, 26 teeth, RPP 8mm, 1.125" I.D. (for 1-1/2 hp motor, 60 hertz,
includes item 11)
11 2 10136 - Socket Set Screw, 1/4-20 x 5/16", cup point, s.s.
12 1 42472 - Pulley, timing, 31 teeth, RPP 8mm, 1.375" I.D. (for 3 hp motor, 50 hertz,
includes item 13)
13 2 10139 - Socket Set Screw, 5/16-18 x 5/16", 17-4, Nylok
14 1 42353 - Pulley, timing, 26 teeth, RPP 8mm, 1.375" I.D. (for 3 hp motor, 60 hertz,
includes item 15)
15 2 10139 - Socket Set Screw, 5/16-18 x 5/16", 17-4, Nylok
16 1 80480 - Timing Belt, TP1760-8MGT-30
10.90 Section 10, Parts
Drive Parts
 Section 10, Parts 10.91
Drive Parts
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 80019 - Pulley, timing, 122 teeth, Dayco
2 6 10132 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4", Nylok
3 6 10009 - Washer, flat, 3/8", s.s., thin
4 1 80438 - Pulley, timing, 24 teeth RPP 8mm
5 1 47100 - Key, 3/16" x 3/16" x 1-3/4"
6 2 80280 - Flange, 1.615" I.D. x 2.625" O.D.
7 1 42457 - Shims, set of six
8 1 80282 - O-ring, 1/16" x 1-5/8" x 1-3/4", Viton
9 1 53036 - End Cap (circular spindle)
10 3 10406 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 3/4", Nylok
11 1 80440 - Pulley, timing, 30 teeth RPP 8mm
12 1 47100 - Key, 3/16" x 3/16" x 1-3/4"
13 2 80281 - Flange, 2.010" I.D. x 3.125" O.D.
14 1 53042 - Shims, set of six
15 1 80283 - O-ring, 1/16" x 2-1/8" x 2-1/4", Viton
16 1 80279 - End Cap, crosscut spindle
17 3 10406 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 3/4", Nylok
18 1 80480 - Timing Belt, TP1760-8MGT-30
19 1 80496 - Bracket, belt tension gauge (includes item 20)
20 1 98158 - Label, belt tension
21 1 10007 - Washer, flat, 1/4", s.s., thin
22 1 10236 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8", s.s.
23 1 * - Pulley, timing, RPP 8mm (includes item 24)
24 2 * - Socket Set Screw

Alternate parts
25 1 80437 - Pulley, timing, 26 teeth, RPP 8mm (replaces item 4, see the chart below)
26 1 80493 - Pulley, timing, 22 teeth, RPP 8mm (replaces item 4, see the chart below)
27 1 80444 - Pulley, timing, 28 teeth, RPP 8mm (replaces item 11, see the chart below)
* See Motor and Motor Pulley on the previous page.

Drive Parts
Item 1 Item 4 Item 11 Item 23 Circular Crosscut
Impeller
Impeller Pulley Circular Pulley Crosscut Pulley Motor Pulley Knife Knife
Speed*
Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number Spindle Spindle
RPM
Number of Teeth Number of Teeth Number of Teeth Number of teeth RPM RPM
60 Hertz, 1.5 hp (1.1 kW) motor
Standard 80019 122 80438 24 80440 30 42354 26 186 875 812
High 80019 122 80437 26 80444 28 42354 26 186 947 758
Medium 80019 122 80493 22 80440 30 42354 26 186 802 812
50 Hertz, 1.5 hp (1.1 kW) motor
Standard 80019 122 80438 24 80440 30 80234 31 186 875 812
High 80019 122 80437 26 80444 28 80234 31 186 947 758
Medium 80019 122 80493 22 80440 30 80234 31 186 802 812
60 Hertz, 3 hp (2.2 kW) motor
Standard* 80019 122 80438 24 80440 30 42353 26 186 875 812
High 80019 122 80437 26 80444 28 42353 26 186 947 758
Medium 80019 122 80493 22 80440 30 42353 26 186 802 812
50 Hertz, 3 hp (2.2 kW) motor
Standard* 80019 122 80438 24 80440 30 42472 31 186 875 812
High 80019 122 80437 26 80444 28 42472 31 186 947 758
Medium 80019 122 80493 22 80440 30 42472 31 186 802 812
*A machine with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) is equipped with Standard drive parts, 3 hp motor only. The rotating
speeds of the cutting parts shown in the chart are with VFD setting at F0.60 on the display (5 on the potentiometer dial).
10.92 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Assembly, VFD

The electrical assembly is

supplied with either mini
circuit breakers or fuses.
 Section 10, Parts 10.93
Electrical Assembly, VFD
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
– 1 80531 - Electrical Assembly, Sprint 2, VFD, discharge extension (includes items 1–15)
1 1 13408 - Padlock With Chain
2 1 11593 - Breather/Drain, 1/4"
3 1 21499 - Split Ring, s.s.
4 1 21778 - Padlock Retainer
5 1 See Chart 1 - Variable Frequency Drive, 230 volts, 17.5 amps (includes item 6)
6 1 21655 - Digital Operator, V1000
7 4 10415 - Round Head Machine Screw, with washer, 8-32 x 1/2"
8 1 See Chart 2 - Control Circuit Transformer, 50 VA
9 4 10625 - Round Head Machine Screw, with washer, 10-32 x 1/2"

Short Circuit Protective Device (SCPD), choose circuit breakers (items 10–11) or fuses (items 12–15).
10 1 See Chart 3 - Circuit Breaker, mini, 3 pole, main (MCB1)
11 1 See Chart 4 - Circuit Breaker, mini, 2 pole, primary (MCB2)
12 3 See Chart 5 - Fuse, cube, main (FU1)
13 3 21349 - Fuse Base, 30 amp, cube (for FU1)
14 2 See Chart 2 - Fuse, primary (FU2)
15 1 12930 - Modular Fuse Holder, 2 pole (for FU2)
16 1 80468 - Wiring Diagram, Sprint 2, VFD

Electrical assemblies also include the Guard Locking Switch and Enclosure Fittings. See the following pages.
The Wiring Diagram is shown following the assembly and enclosure illustrations and parts lists.

Chart 1
Variable Frequency Drive Chart

Voltage VFD Part Number

200-240 21524
380-460 21525

Chart 2 Chart 3
Item 8 Control Circuit Transformer Item 10 Mini Circuit Breaker (MCB1)
Item 14 Transformer Fuse (FU2) VFD Input VFD VFD Item 10
Item 8 Item 14 Current Rating Input Part Main MCB1 (3 pole)
Where Primary
Transformer Hertz Primary Fuse (Amps) Voltage Number Part Number Amps
Used
Part Number
Voltage Size Part Number 18.9 200-240 21524 21611 40
N. America 12927 200-240 50/60 1.00 12925 10.4 380-460 21525 21608 20
Elsewhere 12927 200-240 50/60 1.00 12929
N. America 12927 440-480 50/60 .50 12926
Elsewhere 12928 380-415 50/60 .50 12924
N. America 21310 575 50/60 .40 21509

Chart 4
Chart 5
Item 11 Mini Circuit Breaker (MCB2)
Item 11 Item 12 Cube Fuses (FU1)
Transformer Primary Primary MCB2 VFD Input VFD VFD Item 12 Main Fuse
Part Number Voltage (2 Pole) Current Rating Input Voltage Part Part Size
Size Part Number (Amps) Rating Number Number (Amps)
12927 200-240 1.00 21613 18.9 200-240 21524 21329 30
12928 380-415 .50 21612 10.4 380-460 21525 21327 20
12927 440-480 .50 21612
10.94 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Enclosure, VFD

The electrical assembly is

supplied with either mini
circuit breakers or fuses.
 Section 10, Parts 10.95
Electrical Enclosure, VFD
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 80466 - Electrical Enclosure, Sprint 2, VFD (includes items 2–17)
2 1 21560 - Disconnect Switch Handle (for DISC2, includes O-ring)
3 1 21460 - Disconnect Rod Guide
4 2 21557 - Disconnect Switch, 3 pole, non-fusible, 40 amp (DISC1 and DISC2)
5 4 10415 - Round Head Machine Screw, with washer, 8-32 x 1/2"
6 1 12943 - Auxiliary Contact, normally open (for DISC2)
7 1 21559 - Disconnect Shaft, extended, 10.4" long (for DISC2)
8 1 21781 - Control Relay, 2 normally open, 2 normally closed, 24 volt (CR1)
9 1 21545 - Control Relay, 3 normally open, 1 normally closed, 24 volt (CR2)
10 1 21515 - Standstill Monitor (PILZ/PSWZ)
11 1 21634 - Safety Relay
12 1 21617 - Circuit Breaker, mini, 1 pole, 2 amp (MCB3, secondary)
13 3 21442 - Grounding Block, size 4
14 3 21443 - Grounding Block, size 10
15 6 21439 - End Anchor
16 13 21438 - Terminal Block
17 4 21500 - Terminal Block, double circuit
10.96 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Enclosure, VFD (Door Parts)
 Section 10, Parts 10.97
Electrical Enclosure, VFD (Door Parts)
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 80466 - Electrical Enclosure, Sprint 2, VFD (includes items 2–27)
– 1 21763 - Push Button Assembly, E-Stop, 2 normally closed (includes items 2–6)
2 1 21427 - Push Button, stop
3 2 21429 - Contact Block, normally closed, with latch
4 1 21428 - Legend Plate, yellow, round
5 1 21578 - Washer, push button, anti-rotation
6 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
– 2 21622 - Push Button Assembly, reset (includes items 7–10)
7 1 21623 - Push Button, reset
8 1 21430 - Contact Block, normally open, with latch
9 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
10 1 21431 - Boot, push button
– 1 21723 - Push Button Assembly, stop, std (includes items 11–14)
11 1 21487 - Push Button, stop
12 1 21429 - Contact Block, normally closed, with latch
13 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
14 1 21721 - Boot, extended, push button, A-B
– 2 21424 - Push Button Assembly, start (includes items 15–18)
15 1 21425 - Push Button, start
16 1 21430 - Contact Block, normally open, with latch
17 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
18 1 21431 - Boot, push button
– 2 21648 - Pilot Light Assembly, 24 volt, green (includes items 19–22)
19 1 21434 - Pilot Light
20 1 21491 - Pilot Light Lamp Module, 24 volt
21 1 21432 - Latch, push button
22 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
– 1 21734 - Potentiometer, 2.5k Ohm, sanitary (includes items 23–25)
23 1 21733 - Potentiometer Receptacle
24 1 21749 - Potentiometer Body, 2.5k Ohm
25 1 * - Legend Plate, potentiometer
26 1 * - Door Gasket (fitting and adhesive required)
27 2 21270 - Quarter Turn Latch Assembly (Industrial Enclosures)
2 21271 - Quarter Turn Latch Assembly (Hoffman Enclosures)

* Contact an Urschel representative.

10.98 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Schematic 80468

GUARD LOCK SWITCH

FEED COVER/DISCHARGE
GUARD LOCK SWITCH
BACK COVER, HINGED

GUARD LOCK SWITCH

PRODUCT TAKE AWAY DEVICE
 Section 10, Parts 10.99
Electrical Schematic 80468 Charts

GUARD LOCK SWITCH #1 FEED COVER/DISCHARGE

GUARD LOCK SWITCH #2 BACK COVER, HINGED GUARD LOCK SWITCH #3 PRODUCT TAKE AWAY DEVICE
10.100 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Assembly, VFD, CE
 Section 10, Parts 10.101
Electrical Assembly, VFD, CE
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
– 1 80532 - Electrical Assembly, Sprint 2, VFD, CE, discharge extension (includes items 1–5)
1 1 13408 - Padlock With Chain
2 1 11593 - Breather/Drain, 1/4"
3 1 21499 - Split Ring, s.s.
4 1 21778 - Padlock Retainer
5 1 21608 - Circuit Breaker, mini, 3 pole, main, 20 amp (MCB1)
6 1 80471 - Wiring Diagram, Sprint 2, VFD, CE

Electrical assemblies also include the Guard Locking Switch and Enclosure Fittings. See the following pages.
Wiring Diagrams are shown following the assembly and enclosure illustrations and parts lists.
10.102 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Enclosure, VFD, CE
 Section 10, Parts 10.103
Electrical Enclosure, VFD, CE
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 80469 - Electrical Enclosure, Sprint 2, VFD, CE (includes items 2–27)
2 1 21560 - Disconnect Switch Handle (for DISC2, includes O-ring)
3 1 21460 - Disconnect Rod Guide
4 2 21557 - Disconnect Switch, 3 pole, non-fusible, 40 amp (DISC1 and DISC2)
5 4 10415 - Round Head Machine Screw, with washer, 8-32 x 1/2"
6 1 12943 - Auxiliary Contact, normally open (for DISC2)
7 1 21559 - Disconnect Shaft, extended, 10.4" long (for DISC2)
8 1 21781 - Control Relay, 2 normally open, 2 normally closed, 24 volt (CR1)
9 1 21545 - Control Relay, 3 normally open, 1 normally closed, 24 volt (CR2)
10 1 21515 - Standstill Monitor (PILZ/PSWZ)
11 1 21634 - Safety Relay
12 1 21612 - Circuit Breaker, mini, 2 pole, .5 amp (MCB2, primary)
13 1 21617 - Circuit Breaker, mini, 1 pole, 2 amp (MCB3, secondary)
14 1 21525 - Variable Frequency Drive, 460 volt, 9.2 amp (includes item 15)
15 1 21655 - Digital Operator, V1000
16 4 10415 - Round Head Machine Screw, with washer, 8-32 x 1/2"
17 1 21385 - Power Line Filter, 15 amp, 3 phase
18 4 10625 - Round Head Machine Screw, with washer, 10-32 x 1/2"
19 1 12813 - Ferrite
20 1 10625 - Round Head Machine Screw, with washer, 10-32 x 1/2"
21 1 12928 - Control Circuit Transformer, 50 VA
22 4 10625 - Round Head Machine Screw, with washer, 10-32 x 1/2"
23 3 21442 - Grounding Block, size 4
24 3 21443 - Grounding Block, size 10
25 6 21439 - End Anchor
26 13 21438 - Terminal Block
27 4 21500 - Terminal Block, double circuit
10.104 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Enclosure, VFD, CE (Door Parts)
 Section 10, Parts 10.105
Electrical Enclosure, VFD, CE (Door Parts)
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 80469 - Electrical Enclosure, Sprint 2, VFD, CE (includes items 2–27)
– 1 21763 - Push Button Assembly, E-Stop, 2 normally closed (includes items 2–6)
2 1 21427 - Push Button, stop
3 2 21429 - Contact Block, normally closed, with latch
4 1 21428 - Legend Plate, yellow, round
5 1 21578 - Washer, push button, anti-rotation
6 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
– 2 21622 - Push Button Assembly, reset (includes items 7–10)
7 1 21623 - Push Button, reset
8 1 21430 - Contact Block, normally open, with latch
9 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
10 1 21431 - Boot, push button
– 1 21723 - Push Button Assembly, stop, std (includes items 11–14)
11 1 21487 - Push Button, stop
12 1 21429 - Contact Block, normally closed, with latch
13 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
14 1 21721 - Boot, extended, push button, A-B
– 2 21424 - Push Button Assembly, start (includes items 15–18)
15 1 21425 - Push Button, start
16 1 21430 - Contact Block, normally open, with latch
17 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
18 1 21431 - Boot, push button
– 2 21648 - Pilot Light Assembly, 24 volt, green (includes items 19–22)
19 1 21434 - Pilot Light
20 1 21491 - Pilot Light Lamp Module, 24 volt
21 1 21432 - Latch, push button
22 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
– 1 21734 - Potentiometer, 2.5k Ohm, sanitary (includes items 23–25)
23 1 21733 - Potentiometer Receptacle
24 1 21749 - Potentiometer Body, 2.5k Ohm
25 1 * - Legend Plate, potentiometer
26 1 * - Door Gasket (fitting and adhesive required)
27 2 21270 - Quarter Turn Latch Assembly (Industrial Enclosures)
2 21271 - Quarter Turn Latch Assembly (Hoffman Enclosures)

* Contact an Urschel representative.

10.106 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Schematic 80471

GUARD LOCK SWITCH

FEED COVER/DISCHARGE
GUARD LOCK SWITCH
BACK COVER, HINGED

GUARD LOCK SWITCH

PRODUCT TAKE AWAY DEVICE
 Section 10, Parts 10.107
Electrical Schematic 80471 Charts

GUARD LOCK SWITCH #1 FEED COVER/DISCHARGE

GUARD LOCK SWITCH #2 BACK COVER, HINGED GUARD LOCK SWITCH #3 PRODUCT TAKE AWAY DEVICE
10.108 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Assembly, Soft Start

The electrical assembly is

supplied with either mini
circuit breakers or fuses.
 Section 10, Parts 10.109
Electrical Assembly, Soft Start
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
– 1 80533 - Electrical Assembly, Sprint 2, soft start, discharge extension (includes items 1–12)
1 1 13408 - Padlock With Chain
2 1 11593 - Breather/Drain, 1/4"
3 1 21499 - Split Ring, s.s.
4 1 21778 - Padlock Retainer
5 1 See Chart 1 - Control Circuit Transformer, 50 VA
6 4 10625 - Round Head Machine Screw, with washer, 10-32 x 1/2"

Short Circuit Protective Device (SCPD), choose circuit breakers (items 7–8) or fuses (items 9–12).
7 1 See Chart 2 - Circuit Breaker, mini, 3 pole, main (MCB1)
8 1 See Chart 3 - Circuit Breaker, mini, 2 pole, primary (MCB2)
9 3 See Chart 4 - Fuse, cube, main (FU1)
10 3 21349 - Fuse Base, 30 amp, cube (for FU1)
11 2 See Chart 1 - Fuse, primary (FU2)
12 1 12930 - Modular Fuse Holder, 2 pole (for FU2)
13 1 80474 - Wiring Diagram, soft start, Sprint 2

Electrical assemblies also include the Guard Locking Switch and Enclosure Fittings. See the following pages.
Wiring Diagrams are shown following the assembly and enclosure illustrations and parts lists.

Chart 1 Chart 3
Item 5 Control Circuit Transformer Item 8 Mini Circuit Breaker (MCB2)
Item 11 Transformer Fuse (FU2) Item 8
Item 5
Primary Primary MCB2
Item 5
Primary
Item 11 Transformer
Where
Transformer Hertz Primary Fuse Voltage (2 Pole)
Used Voltage Part Number
Part Number Size Part Number Size Part Number
N. America 12927 200-240 50/60 1.00 12925 12927 200-240 1.00 21613
Elsewhere 12927 200-240 50/60 1.00 12929 12928 380-415 .50 21612
N. America 12927 440-480 50/60 .50 12926 12927 440-480 .50 21612
Elsewhere 12928 380-415 50/60 .50 12924
N. America 21310 575 50/60 .40 21509

Chart 2 Chart 4
Item 7 Mini Circuit Breaker Item 9 Cube Fuse (FU1)
(MCB1) Motor Full Main Fuse Fuse
Motor Full MCB Size Load Part Size
Load (3 pole) (Amps) Amperage Number (Amps)
Amperage Part 0 - 1.71 21384 3
Number 1.72 - 3.42 21341 6
0 - 1.71 21602 3 3.43 - 5.71 21339 10
1.72 - 2.85 21603 5 5.72 - 8.57 21325 15
2.86 - 3.42 21604 6 8.58 - 10.00 21326 17.5
3.43 - 4.57 21605 8 10.01 - 11.42 21327 20
4.58 - 5.71 21606 10 11.43 - 14.28 21328 25
5.72 - 7.43 21632 13 14.29 - 17.14 21329 30
7.44 - 8.57 21607 15 17.15 - 20.00 21330 35
8.58 - 11.42 21608 20 20.01 - 22.85 21331 40
11.43 - 14.28 21609 25 22.86 - 25.71 21332 45
14.29 - 17.14 21610 30 25.72 - 28.57 21333 50
17.15 - 20.00 21611 40 28.58 - 32.00 21334 60
10.110 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Enclosure, Soft Start

The electrical assembly is

supplied with either mini
circuit breakers or fuses.
 Section 10, Parts 10.111
Electrical Enclosure, Soft Start
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 80472 - Electrical Enclosure, Sprint 2, soft start, (includes items 2–20)
1 80475 - Electrical Enclosure, Sprint 2, 1.5 hp, 380-575 volt, soft start, (includes items 2–20)
2 1 21560 - Disconnect Switch Handle (for DISC2, includes O-ring)
3 1 21460 - Disconnect Rod Guide
4 2 21557 - Disconnect Switch, 3 pole, non-fusible, 40 amp (DISC1 and DISC2)
5 4 10415 - Round Head Machine Screw, with washer, 8-32 x 1/2"
6 1 12943 - Auxiliary Contact, normally open (for DISC2)
7 1 21559 - Disconnect Shaft, extended, 10.4" long (for DISC2)
8 1 21515 - Standstill Monitor (PILZ/PSWZ)
9 1 21634 - Safety Relay
10 1 21617 - Circuit Breaker, mini, 1 pole, 2 amp (MCB3, secondary)
11 1 21488 - Contactor, 26 amp, 24 volt coil (1M)
12 1 21468 - Auxiliary Contact, ABB, normally open (for 1M)
13 1 21469 - Auxiliary Contact, ABB, normally closed (for 1M)
14 2 21666 - Control Relay, 1/2" wide, 24 volt (CR1 and CR2)
15 1 21668 - Soft Start Controller, 16 amp, 24 volt
1 21667 - Soft Start Controller, 9 amp, 24 volt (for 380-575 volt machines only)
16 1 21601 - Soft Start Overload Reset Solenoid (1R)
17 3 21442 - Grounding Block, size 4
18 3 21443 - Grounding Block, size 10
19 8 21439 - End Anchor
20 20 21438 - Terminal Block
10.112 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Enclosure, Soft Start (Door Parts)
 Section 10, Parts 10.113
Electrical Enclosure, Soft Start (Door Parts)
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
1 1 80472 - Electrical Enclosure, Sprint 2, soft start (includes items 2–24)
– 1 21763 - Push Button Assembly, E-Stop, 2 normally closed (includes items 2–6)
2 1 21427 - Push Button, stop
3 2 21429 - Contact Block, normally closed, with latch
4 1 21428 - Legend Plate, yellow, round
5 1 21578 - Washer, push button, anti-rotation
6 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
– 2 21622 - Push Button Assembly, reset (includes items 7–10)
7 1 21623 - Push Button, reset
8 1 21430 - Contact Block, normally open, with latch
9 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
10 1 21431 - Boot, push button
– 2 21424 - Push Button Assembly, start (includes items 11–14)
11 1 21425 - Push Button, start
12 1 21430 - Contact Block, normally open, with latch
13 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
14 1 21431 - Boot, push button
– 1 21723 - Push Button Assembly, stop, std (includes items 15–18)
15 1 21487 - Push Button, stop
16 1 21429 - Contact Block, normally closed, with latch
17 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
18 1 21721 - Boot, extended, push button, A-B
– 2 21648 - Pilot Light Assembly, 24 volt, green (includes items 19–22)
19 1 21434 - Pilot Light
20 1 21491 - Pilot Light Lamp Module, 24 volt
21 1 21432 - Latch, push button
22 1 21572 - Push Button Nut, metal
23 1 * - Door Gasket (fitting and adhesive required)
24 2 21270 - Quarter Turn Latch Assembly (Industrial Enclosures)
2 21271 - Quarter Turn Latch Assembly (Hoffman Enclosures)

* Contact an Urschel representative.

10.114 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Schematic 80474
 Section 10, Parts 10.115
Electrical Schematic 80474 Charts

GUARD LOCK SWITCH #1 FEED COVER/DISCHARGE

GUARD LOCK SWITCH #2 BACK COVER, HINGED

GUARD LOCK SWITCH #3 PRODUCT TAKE AWAY DEVICE

10.116 Section 10, Parts
Guard Locking Switches

Guard Locking
Switch Number 1

Guard Locking
Switch Number 2

Guard Locking
Switch Number 3
 Section 10, Parts 10.117
Guard Locking Switches
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Electrical assemblies include the following parts:
1 1 21552 - Guard Locking Switch (includes item 2)
2 1 21562 - Guard Lock Switch, flexible actuator
3 1 21658 - Cord Connector, straight, 1/2" NPT, s.s.
4 2 21274 - Button Head Screw, T25 Torx, 10-24 x 7/8"
5 6 10006 - Washer, flat, #10, s.s., thin
6 6 10231 - Hex Nut, 10-24, s.s., locking
7 4 10454 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 1-1/2", s.s.
8 1 53391 - Spacer, 3/32" (2.4 mm)
– 1 80505 - Bushing, cable assembly (includes items 9–10)
9 1 80504 - Bushing, cable
10 1 21497 - Nut, breather drain
11 1 21552 - Guard Locking Switch (includes item 12)
12 1 21562 - Guard Lock Switch, flexible actuator
13 1 21658 - Cord Connector, straight, 1/2" NPT, s.s.
14 4 10630 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 1-3/4", s.s.
15 4 10231 - Hex Nut, 10-24, s.s., locking
16 2 10006 - Washer, flat, #10, s.s., thin
17 2 21274 - Button Head Screw, T25 Torx, 10-24 x 7/8"
18 1 53391 - Spacer, 3/32" (2.4 mm)
19 1 21552 - Guard Locking Switch (includes item 20)
20 1 21562 - Guard Lock Switch, flexible actuator
21 1 21658 - Cord Connector, straight, 1/2" NPT, s.s.
22 4 10454 - Socket Head Cap Screw, 10-24 x 1-1/2", s.s.
23 1 80502 - Bracket, actuator
24 2 10037 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2", s.s.
25 2 10365 - Hex Nut, 1/4-20, s.s., locking, thin
26 2 53388 - Button Head Screw, T25 Torx, 10-24 x 3/4", s.s.
27 2 10006 - Washer, flat, #10, s.s., thin
28 2 10231 - Hex Nut, 10-24, s.s., locking
29 9 21474 - Wire Tie Clip, 1 wire
30 9 13465 - Cable Tie Clip
31 20 11513 - Cable Tie
32 1 34211 - Chain, guard lock switch
33 2 34212 - Shackle, guard lock switch (includes hardware)
34 1 34199 - Bracket, key and shackle, conveyor interlock
10.118 Section 10, Parts
Electrical Enclosure Fittings

Enclosure Fitting Layout

For Soft Start Enclosure

3 hp Motor 1-1/2 hp Motor

 Section 10, Parts 10.119
Electrical Enclosure Fittings
Item Quantity Part Number and Description
Electrical assemblies include the following parts:
1 2 21368 - Cord Connector, 90 degree, .63"/.75"
2 1 11966 - Seal Washer, 3/16" x 1-5/16" x 1-3/4"
3 1 11957 - Lock Nut, 1" NPT
4 3 11877 - Cord Connector, straight, .236"/.472"
5 3 11900 - Seal Washer, 3/16" x 7/8" x 1-9/32"
6 3 11611 - Lock Nut, 1/2"
7 4 10044 - Hex Head Cap Screw, 5/16-18 x 5/8", s.s

Items below are not included with the electrical assembly; use at the power source entry point.
8 1 11582 - Conduit Hub, 1" (includes O-ring and lock nut)
9 1 11591 - Hole Seal, 1-3/8"
10 1 10231 - Hex Nut, 10-24, s.s., locking
– 1 11626 - Cord Connector Assembly, 90 degree, .437"/.562" (includes items 11, 15, 16)
11 1 11625 - Cord Connector, 90 degree, .437"/.562"
– 1 21370 - Cord Connector Assembly, 90 degree, .63"/.75" (includes items 12, 15, 16)
12 1 21368 - Cord Connector, 90 degree, .63"/.75"
– 1 21371 - Cord Connector Assembly, 90 degree, .75"/.88" (includes items 13, 15, 16)
13 1 21369 - Cord Connector, 90 degree, .75"/.88"
– 1 21372 - Cord Connector Assembly, 90 degree, .88"/1.00" (includes items 14, 15, 16)
14 1 11972 - Cord Connector, 90 degree, .88"/1.00"
15 1 11966 - Seal Washer, 3/16" x 1-5/16" x 1-3/4"
16 1 11624 - Lock Nut
10.120 Section 10, Parts
Dimensional Drawing, with Casters
 Section 10, Parts 10.121
Dimensional Drawing, without Casters
w w w . u r s c h e l . c o m

CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS
1200 Cutting Edge Drive
Chesterton, Indiana 46304 U.S.A.
Corporate: +1.219.464.4811 Fax: +1.219.462.3879
Toll Free: +1.844.URSCHEL (877.2435)
www.urschel.com
Technical Publication inquiries: techpubs@urschel.com
Other inquiries: info@urschel.com
Subsidiaries and sales offices in principal cities worldwide.

The Global Leader in Food Cutting Technology™

Publication Number Publication Description

L2855 MANUAL, ENGLISH, INSTRUCTION, SPRINT 2
L2856 MANUAL, ENGLISH, PARTS, SPRINT 2